559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface For use with HC900 ... · iv 559 and 1042 Series Operator...

Honeywell Process Solutions

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface

For use with HC900 Hybrid Controller

User Guide

Doc. No.: 51-52-25-108

Revision: 13

Date: May 2014

ii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2014 by Honeywell Revision 13 May 2014

Warranty/Remedy

Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship. Contact your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer's sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.

While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.

Honeywell Process Solutions

1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S

Houston, TX 77042

HC900, 559 and 1042 are U.S. registered trademarks of Honeywell

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide iii 05/14

About This Document

Abstract

This manual describes the installation and operation of the 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interfaces.

References

The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this publication.

Document Title Doc ID

HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide (legacy) 51-52-25-107

Process Control Designer User Guide 51-52-25-110

Process Control Designer Function Block Reference Guide 51-52-25-109

HC900 Process Controller Communications User Guide 51-52-25-111

HC900 Controller Redundancy Overview & System Operation 51-52-25-133

Contacts

World Wide Web

The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Corporate http://www.honeywell.com

Honeywell Process Solutions http://hpsweb.honeywell.com

Technical tips http://content.honeywell.com/ipc/faq

Telephone

Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.

Organization Phone Number

United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support 1-800-525-7439 Service

iv 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Symbol Definitions

The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation and literature. If present on a product, the user must consult the appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more information.

This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

WARNING PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury.

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices

Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.

Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.

Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide v 05/14

Contents

Symbol Definitions .................................................................................................. iv

Introduction ............................................................................................. 1

Overview.................................................................................................................. 1

CE Conformity (Europe) ........................................................................................... 2

Overview of Architecture ......................................................................... 3

Description of Components ...................................................................................... 3

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup ................................................... 5

Specifications ........................................................................................................... 5

Site Preparation ....................................................................................................... 7

OI Mounting ............................................................................................................. 7

Wiring .................................................................................................................... 15

Noise Protection..................................................................................................... 19

Startup ................................................................................................................... 19

Keys and Displays Overview ................................................................. 21

Overview of Keys ................................................................................................... 21

Standard Keys ....................................................................................................... 23

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys .................................................................... 25

User-assignable Keys ............................................................................................ 29

Relabeling Display Group Keys .............................................................................. 31

Overview of Displays .............................................................................................. 33

Main Menu ............................................................................................ 39

Overview................................................................................................................ 39

Recipes ................................................................................................. 44

Setpoint Programmers .......................................................................... 46

Overview................................................................................................................ 46

Setpoint Program Setup ......................................................................................... 47

Select program....................................................................................................... 48

Edit program .......................................................................................................... 49

Contents

vi 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Edit segments ........................................................................................................ 51

Save program ........................................................................................................ 52

Setpoint Program Operation ................................................................................... 53

SPP operation - Model 1042 .................................................................................. 54

SPP operation - Model 559 .................................................................................... 56

Load program ........................................................................................................ 60

Edit segments ........................................................................................................ 63

Setpoint Scheduler ................................................................................ 65

Overview................................................................................................................ 65

Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042 .................................................... 66

Edit schedule ......................................................................................................... 67

Edit segments ........................................................................................................ 68

Edit setpoints ......................................................................................................... 69

Edit segment events ............................................................................................... 70

Edit guarantee hold ................................................................................................ 71

Save schedule ....................................................................................................... 72

Setpoint Schedule Operation .................................................................................. 74

Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042 .............................................................. 75

Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559 ................................................................ 77

Load schedule ....................................................................................................... 81

View schedule events ............................................................................................ 83

View auxiliary data ................................................................................................. 84

Edit segments ........................................................................................................ 85

Sequencers ........................................................................................... 87

Overview................................................................................................................ 87

Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042 ................................................................ 88

Save Sequence...................................................................................................... 95

Sequencer Operation ............................................................................................. 96

Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 ........................................................................ 97

Sequencer Operation - Model 559 .......................................................................... 98

Load Sequencer................................................................................................... 100

View/Edit Sequence ............................................................................................. 101

Edit Steps/Edit Step Details .................................................................................. 102

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide vii 05/14

Loops .................................................................................................. 103

Overview.............................................................................................................. 103

What’s in this section ........................................................................................... 104

Common Loop Tasks ........................................................................................... 105

Loop Setup .......................................................................................................... 106

Loop Operation Displays ...................................................................................... 119

Summary Displays .............................................................................. 129

Analog Input Summary ......................................................................................... 129

Analog Output Summary ...................................................................................... 131

Digital Input Summary .......................................................................................... 132

Digital Output Summary ....................................................................................... 133

Variable Summary ............................................................................................... 134

Alarms ................................................................................................. 137

Overview.............................................................................................................. 137

Alarm indication ................................................................................................... 137

Alarm Summary ................................................................................................... 138

Alarm Group ........................................................................................................ 139

Alarm Detail ......................................................................................................... 140

Events ................................................................................................. 141

Event Summary ................................................................................................... 141

Diagnostics .......................................................................................... 142

Overview.............................................................................................................. 142

Controller diagnostics ........................................................................................... 143

I/O module diagnostics ......................................................................................... 147

I/O Module Diagnostics physical details ................................................................ 153

Panel diagnostic log ............................................................................................. 154

Communication Ports diagnostics......................................................................... 155

Unit Setup ........................................................................................... 159

Controller Status .................................................................................................. 160

Set Mode ............................................................................................................. 160

Write Database to Flash Memory ......................................................................... 162

Set Time and Date ............................................................................................... 163

Contents

viii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Set Security/Review Security ............................................................................... 163

Set Language ...................................................................................................... 167

Communication Ports ........................................................................................... 168

File Name Selection ............................................................................................. 183

Self Tests ............................................................................................................. 184

Calibrate AI .......................................................................................................... 185

Calibrate AO ........................................................................................................ 193

Calibrate Motor .................................................................................................... 198

Display brightness ................................................................................................ 207

Disk Utilities ......................................................................................... 208

Overview.............................................................................................................. 208

List disk files ........................................................................................................ 209

Load/store SP profiles .......................................................................................... 210

Load/store SP schedules ..................................................................................... 212

Load/Store sequences ......................................................................................... 214

Load/store recipes ............................................................................................... 216

Format disk .......................................................................................................... 218

Set Controller Mode ............................................................................................. 219

Data Storage ....................................................................................... 221

Overview.............................................................................................................. 221

Data Storage Operation ....................................................................................... 230

Log Off/Log On .................................................................................... 239

Other Operating Displays .................................................................... 241

Overview.............................................................................................................. 241

Pushbuttons ......................................................................................................... 242

4-Selector Switch ................................................................................................. 243

Device Control ..................................................................................................... 244

Hand/Off/Auto Switch ........................................................................................... 246

Stage ................................................................................................................... 247

Ramp ................................................................................................................... 249

Alternator ............................................................................................................. 252

Calendar Event Block ........................................................................................... 256

Calendar Event Operation .................................................................................... 257

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide ix 05/14

Monitoring Displays ............................................................................. 265

Overview.............................................................................................................. 265

Trend Displays ..................................................................................................... 266

Bar Graph Displays .............................................................................................. 270

Panel Displays ..................................................................................................... 271

Other Monitoring Displays .................................................................................... 275

Maintenance ........................................................................................ 277

Overview.............................................................................................................. 277

Parts .................................................................................................................... 277

Messages ............................................................................................ 279

Overview.............................................................................................................. 279

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays ................ 289

Overview.............................................................................................................. 289

Communication Ports Displays ............................................................................. 290

Alarms/Events/Diags ............................................................................................ 295

Controller Diagnostics Overview ........................................................................... 296

Lead CPU Diagnostics Display ............................................................................. 299

Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display........................................................................ 299

Communication Ports ........................................................................................... 302

Rack Diagnostics Displays ................................................................................... 303

Appendix B .......................................................................................... 311

Security Bypass Procedure .................................................................................. 311

Index ................................................................................................... 313

Contents

x 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Tables

Table 1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 5

Table 2 Mounting ................................................................................................................................................ 14

Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting ........................................................................................................ 15

Table 4 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 16

Table 5 Standard key actions ............................................................................................................................... 23

Table 6 Tasks using standard keys ....................................................................................................................... 25

Table 7 User-assignable key actions ..................................................................................................................... 30

Table 8 Display areas defined details ................................................................................................................... 33

Table 9 User-assignable displays ......................................................................................................................... 36

Table 10 Top level functions of main menu .......................................................................................................... 39

Table 11 Main menu tree ..................................................................................................................................... 40

Table 12 Recipe edit/view details ......................................................................................................................... 44

Table 13 SPP inputs and current state................................................................................................................... 46

Table 14 Edit program details .............................................................................................................................. 49

Table 15 Edit segment details .............................................................................................................................. 51

Table 16 Save Program details ............................................................................................................................. 52

Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042 ...................................................................................................................... 54

Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559.............................................................................................................. 56

Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559 ............................................................................................................ 58

Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state ............................................................................................ 59

Table 21 View program events details - Model 559 .............................................................................................. 59

Table 22 View program details- Model 559 ......................................................................................................... 60

Table 23 Program load details .............................................................................................................................. 60

Table 24 Edit segments details ............................................................................................................................. 63

Table 25 SPS inputs and current state................................................................................................................... 65

Table 26 Edit schedule details .............................................................................................................................. 67

Table 27 Edit segment details .............................................................................................................................. 68

Table 28 Edit setpoints details ............................................................................................................................. 69

Table 29 Edit segment events details .................................................................................................................... 70

Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details..................................................................................................................... 71

Table 31 Schedule save details ............................................................................................................................. 72

Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details ........................................................................................................... 73

Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042................................................................................... 75

Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559 .................................................................................... 77

Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559 ......................................................................................... 79

Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state ............................................................................................ 80

Table 37 Schedule load details ............................................................................................................................. 81

Table 38 View schedule events details ................................................................................................................. 83

Table 39 View auxiliary data details .................................................................................................................... 84

Table 40 Edit segments details ............................................................................................................................. 85

Table 41 Edit Sequence ....................................................................................................................................... 89

Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps .............................................................................................................................. 90

Table 43 Edit Step Details ................................................................................................................................... 91

Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example) .............................................................................. 92

Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example) ............................................................................ 93

Table 46 Select State ........................................................................................................................................... 94

Table 47 Sequence save details ............................................................................................................................ 95

Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 ........................................................................................................ 97

Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559 ......................................................................................................... 98

Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559 ........................................................................................ 99

Table 51 Schedule load details ........................................................................................................................... 100

Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps ............................................................................................................................ 101

Table 53 Edit Step Details ................................................................................................................................. 102

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xi 05/14

Table 54 Loop modes ........................................................................................................................................ 103

Table 55 Common loop tasks ............................................................................................................................. 105

Table 56 Loop menu visibility ........................................................................................................................... 106

Table 57 Details of single loop trend .................................................................................................................. 107

Table 58 Details of Loop Accutune III (listed in order of appearance) ................................................................ 108

Table 59 Details of the Tuning Status display ..................................................................................................... 110

Table 60 Details of loop Accutune (not listed in order of appearance) ................................................................. 112

Table 61 Details of loop tune constants .............................................................................................................. 113

Table 62 Details of loop control setup ................................................................................................................ 114

Table 63 Details of carbon loop ......................................................................................................................... 115

Table 64 Details of loop alarm setpoints............................................................................................................. 116

Table 65 Details of loop limits ........................................................................................................................... 117

Table 66 Details of high output limiting ............................................................................................................. 118

Table 67 Loop modes ........................................................................................................................................ 119

Table 68 Details of loop summary ..................................................................................................................... 120

Table 69 Loop control details............................................................................................................................. 121

Table 70 Details of the Tuning Status display ..................................................................................................... 122

Table 71 Multiloop faceplate details .................................................................................................................. 124

Table 72 Single loop numeric details ................................................................................................................. 125

Table 73 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen ......................................................................... 126

Table 74 Details of loop tune constants display .................................................................................................. 127

Table 75 A/M bias details .................................................................................................................................. 128

Table 76 Analog Input Summary details ............................................................................................................. 129

Table 77 Analog Output Summary details ........................................................................................................... 131

Table 78 Digital Input Summary details .............................................................................................................. 132

Table 79 Digital Output Summary details ........................................................................................................... 133

Table 80 Variable summary details .................................................................................................................... 134

Table 81 Details of alarm summary.................................................................................................................... 138

Table 82 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages ......................................................................... 143

Table 83 I/O module diagnostics details ............................................................................................................. 148

Table 84 I/O Module Error Statuses ................................................................................................................... 149

Table 85 Bad module details ............................................................................................................................... 151

Table 86 Bad Channel details ............................................................................................................................. 152

Table 87 I/O module diagnostic details .............................................................................................................. 153

Table 88 Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI) diagnostics and statuses ................................................................... 156

Table 89 Network Port diagnostics..................................................................................................................... 157

Table 90 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 158

Table 91 Controller status details ....................................................................................................................... 160

Table 92 Set mode details .................................................................................................................................. 160

Table 93 Controller modes defined ..................................................................................................................... 161

Table 94 Write Database to Flash Memory ......................................................................................................... 162

Table 95 Set time and date details ....................................................................................................................... 163

Table 96 Set security details .............................................................................................................................. 163

Table 97 Displays and functions that can be secured .......................................................................................... 165

Table 98 Set language details ............................................................................................................................. 167

Table 99 Serial Port S1 diagnostic and status information .................................................................................... 169

Table 100 Serial Port S1 setup parameters........................................................................................................... 170

Table 101 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the Serial Port S1 ......................................................... 171

Table 102 Serial Port S2 (OI) details .................................................................................................................. 172

Table 103 Network port details .......................................................................................................................... 173

Table 104 View network host details .................................................................................................................. 174

Table 105 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators ................................................................................... 175

Table 106 View peer connection details .............................................................................................................. 175

Table 107 View network peer statistics details .................................................................................................... 176

Table 108 Peer Connection Status Indicators ....................................................................................................... 177

Contents

xii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Table 109 Expansion I/O Port details .................................................................................................................. 179

Table 110 Modbus Slave Devices display ........................................................................................................... 180

Table 111 Modbus Slave Details display ............................................................................................................. 181

Table 112 File name selection details ................................................................................................................. 183

Table 113 Self tests details................................................................................................................................. 184

Table 114 Calibrate AI channel details ............................................................................................................... 187

Table 115 Example of AI calibration ................................................................................................................. 188

Table 116 Calibrate CJ temp details ................................................................................................................... 189

Table 117 Example of CJ calibration .................................................................................................................. 190

Table 118 Restore AI factory calibration details ................................................................................................. 191

Table 119 Restore CJ factory calibration details ................................................................................................. 192

Table 120 Calibrate AO channel details ............................................................................................................. 195

Table 121 Example of AO calibration ................................................................................................................. 196

Table 122 Restore AO factory calibration details ............................................................................................... 197

Table 123 Motor Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 199

Table 124 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure .................................................................................................... 200

Table 125 Calibration Errors ............................................................................................................................... 201

Table 126 Auto Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................................. 202

Table 127 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................... 203

Table 128 Hand Calibration Procedure ............................................................................................................... 205

Table 129 List disk files details .......................................................................................................................... 209

Table 130 Load/store profiles details.................................................................................................................. 211

Table 131 Load/store schedules details .............................................................................................................. 213

Table 132 Load/store sequence details ............................................................................................................... 214

Table 133 Load/store recipes details .................................................................................................................. 216

Table 134 Format disk details ............................................................................................................................ 218

Table 135 Set mode details ................................................................................................................................ 219

Table 136 Controller modes defined .................................................................................................................. 219

Table 137 Data storage point factors .................................................................................................................. 222

Table 138 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only ........................................................................................ 224

Table 139 Storage modes ................................................................................................................................... 225

Table 140 View storage status details ................................................................................................................. 231

Table 141 Storage controls details...................................................................................................................... 233

Table 142 View storage setting details ............................................................................................................... 236

Table 143 Log off display details ....................................................................................................................... 239

Table 144 Pushbutton details ............................................................................................................................. 242

Table 145 Four selector switch details................................................................................................................ 243

Table 146 Device control display details ............................................................................................................ 244

Table 147 Edit device display details ................................................................................................................. 245

Table 148 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details ................................................................................................ 246

Table 149 Set HOA switch state display details .................................................................................................. 246

Table 150 Stage operator display details ............................................................................................................ 247

Table 151 Edit stage display details ................................................................................................................... 248

Table 152 Ramp operator display details ............................................................................................................ 249

Table 153 Edit ramp sub-menu display details ................................................................................................... 250

Table 154 Edit ramp display details ................................................................................................................... 251

Table 155 Alternator operator display details ..................................................................................................... 253

Table 156 Edit alternator display details ............................................................................................................. 254

Table 157 Edit output sequence display details ................................................................................................... 255

Table 158 Calendar Event Operator Display details ............................................................................................. 257

Table 159 Calendar Event Block Menu details .................................................................................................... 258

Table 160 SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu details .................................................................................. 258

Table 161 EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu details .......................................................................................... 259

Table 162 EDIT EVENT SETPOINT display details .......................................................................................... 260

Table 163 SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu details ............................................................................... 261

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xiii 05/14

Table 164 EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu details ................................................................................................. 262

Table 165 EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu details ................................................................................................... 263

Table 166 VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display details ................................................................... 263

Table 167 Example of trend details .................................................................................................................... 267

Table 168 Trend menu ....................................................................................................................................... 268

Table 169 Sampling rates of trends .................................................................................................................... 269

Table 170 Bar graph display details ................................................................................................................... 270

Table 171 4-point panel details .......................................................................................................................... 272

Table 172 Multi-point panel details .................................................................................................................... 273

Table 173 Overview details ............................................................................................................................... 274

Table 174 Parts.................................................................................................................................................. 277

Table 175 Messages .......................................................................................................................................... 279

Table 176 Location of Redundant Controller Displays ........................................................................................ 289

Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses ................................................................................. 291

Table 178 Network Ports E1 and E2 display....................................................................................................... 293

Table 179 Network Port E1 and Network Port E2 Display details ....................................................................... 294

Table 180 Details of Controller Diagnostics Overview status messages .............................................................. 296

Table 181 Details of Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status messages ..................................................... 299

Table 182 Details of Rack diagnostics error status messages .............................................................................. 303

Contents

xiv 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Figures

Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface ....................................................................................................................... 1

Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface ......................................................................................................................... 1

Figure 3 1042 operator interface ............................................................................................................................ 1

Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture ................................................................................................ 4

Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12 ................................................................. 8

Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12................................................................................... 9

Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12 ............................................................................... 10

Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12 .................................................................. 11

Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12 .................................................................................. 12

Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout ................................................................................ 13

Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042 ............................................................................................. 14

Figure 12 Startup display ..................................................................................................................................... 19

Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface .......................................................................................................... 21

Figure 14 View of 1042 OI .................................................................................................................................. 22

Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions.............................................................................................. 32

Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions ................................................................................. 32

Figure 17 Display areas defined ........................................................................................................................... 33

Figure 18 Display organization ............................................................................................................................ 35

Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042 ....................................................................................... 52

Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042 ................................................................................................................. 54

Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559 ........................................................................................................ 56

Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559 .................................................................................................. 58

Figure 23 View program events - Model 559 ....................................................................................................... 59

Figure 24 View program details - Model 559 ....................................................................................................... 60

Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042 ..................................................... 61

Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042 ............................................................ 62

Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule............................................................................................................... 72

Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042 ............................................................................................ 75

Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559 .............................................................................................. 77

Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559 ......................................................................................... 79

Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number .......................................................................... 81

Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list ................................................................................. 82

Figure 33 View schedule events ........................................................................................................................... 83

Figure 34 View auxiliary data .............................................................................................................................. 84

Figure 35 Edit segments ...................................................................................................................................... 85

Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example)......................................................................................... 90

Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042 .......................................................................................... 97

Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559 ........................................................................................... 98

Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559 ........................................................................................ 99

Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps ........................................................................................................................... 101

Figure 41 IMAN loop mode ............................................................................................................................... 103

Figure 42 Single loop trend ................................................................................................................................ 107

Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only) ............................................ 124

Figure 44 Single loop numeric ........................................................................................................................... 125

Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen ....................................................................................... 126

Figure 46 A/M bias............................................................................................................................................ 128

Figure 47 Alarm group display .......................................................................................................................... 139

Figure 48 Event summary .................................................................................................................................. 141

Figure 49 Controller diagnostics ........................................................................................................................ 143

Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view......................................................................................... 147

Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view .......................................................................................... 147

Contents

Revision 13 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xv 05/14

Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log ........................................................................................................................... 154

Figure 53 Communication ports .......................................................................................................................... 155

Figure 54 Communications ports display ........................................................................................................... 168

Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*) .................................................................................. 174

Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections ....................................................................................... 179

Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections ......................................................................................... 179

Figure 58 File name selection ............................................................................................................................ 183

Figure 59 Self tests ............................................................................................................................................ 184

Figure 60 Brightness display .............................................................................................................................. 207

Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer ................................................ 210

Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler ............................................................... 212

Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer ............................................................. 214

Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage ................................................................................................. 226

Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown .................................................................................... 227

Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions ........................................................................................................ 228

Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions .............................................................................................. 228

Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions ................................................................................................... 229

Figure 69 View storage status ............................................................................................................................ 231

Figure 70 Storage controls ................................................................................................................................. 233

Figure 71 Initialize storage disk ......................................................................................................................... 234

Figure 72 Load storage settings.......................................................................................................................... 235

Figure 73 View storage settings ......................................................................................................................... 236

Figure 74 Start new storage settings ................................................................................................................... 237

Figure 75 Store storage settings ......................................................................................................................... 238

Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys .................................................................................................. 242

Figure 77 Four selector switch display ............................................................................................................... 243

Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu ....................................................................................................... 243

Figure 79 Device control display ....................................................................................................................... 244

Figure 80 Edit device display ............................................................................................................................. 245

Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display ............................................................................................................ 246

Figure 82 Stage operator display ........................................................................................................................ 247

Figure 83 Ramp operator display ....................................................................................................................... 249

Figure 84 Alternator operator displays ............................................................................................................... 252

Figure 85 Trend displays ................................................................................................................................... 266

Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom .................................................................................................................. 269

Figure 87 Bar graph displays ............................................................................................................................. 270

Figure 88 Panel display ..................................................................................................................................... 271

Figure 89 4-point panel display .......................................................................................................................... 272

Figure 90 Multi-point panel display ................................................................................................................... 273

Figure 91 Panel meter ........................................................................................................................................ 273

Figure 92 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 274

Figure 93 Help (messages) display ..................................................................................................................... 275

Figure 94 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 289

Figure 95 Communication Ports Display ............................................................................................................. 290

Figure 96 Alarm/Events/Diag Menu ................................................................................................................... 295

Figure 97 Controller Diagnostics Overview ....................................................................................................... 296

Figure 98 Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics........................................................................................................ 299

Figure 99 Rack Diagnostics Display ................................................................................................................... 303

Revision 12 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide 1 11/08

Introduction

Overview

What’s in this guide

This guide contains instructions on assembly, installation, wiring, and operation of the 559, and 1042 Series Operator Interface, shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.

KB

1 2 3 4 5

F1

F2

F3

F4

ALARM?

ESC

Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface

1 2 3 4 5

F1

F2

F3

F4

ALARM?

ESC

Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface

Honeywell

F1

F2

F3

F4 ?

ESC

ALARM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

. 0 -

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Figure 3 1042 operator interface

Introduction CE Conformity (Europe)

2 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 13 05/14

Typical readers of this guide

The typical users of this guide are:

• the technician who installs the OI,

• the engineer who configures the OI,

• the operator who views/controls/monitors the process.

What you can do with the OI

The OI lets you perform these tasks:

• Monitor and control a process.

• Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Schedules, Sequences, and Unit Configurations.

• Display various process data such as trends, alarms, diagnostics, setpoint profiles, and control loops.

• Store process data to disk.

CE Conformity (Europe)

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council

Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.

ATTENTION

The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters to the antenna(e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.


Overview of Architecture

Description of Components

The OI is an optional component of a control system that contains:

• Controller - As the heart of the system, this supports the following features.

− Control loops

− Analog and digital I/O

− Setpoint programming

− Setpoint scheduler

− Sequencer

− Recipe management

− Start/stop controls

− Function blocks

− Fast logic.

• Hybrid Control Designer - An external PC based configuration tool that is used to graphically

configure the control strategies used by the Controller. It is also used to configure displays and function

keys on the OI. Control strategy configurations are downloaded from Hybrid Control Designer to the

Controller Module through communications or are loaded via the disk drive on the OI.

• Operator Interface - Provides the operator interface for the Controller Module. It lets the operator

− Operate the process through various menus and displays,

− Monitor the process with trends and other graphical displays,

− View and acknowledge alarms.

See Figure 4.

Overview of Architecture Description of Components


Hybrid Control Designer

Controller

Operator Interface - Example is Model 1042 View

• Control Strategy Configuration

• Operator Interface Display Configuration• Operator Interface Function Key Configuration

• Configuration Upload/Download

• Test and Debug Control Strategies

• Integrate Loops of Control withDigital I/O

• Setpoint Programming

• Setpoint Scheduling

• Sequencing

• Alarm Processing• PID Control, Advanced Control,

and Auto-Tuning/Fuzzy Logic

• Boolean Logic Via Function Blocks• Advanced Math Computations

• Monitor and Control the Process

• Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Data Storage Sets,

• Provide organized, visual presentation of information• Data Storage

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Honeywell

F4

ALARM?

ESC

F3

F2

F1

•••• 0

1

4

7

2

5

8

3

6

9

_

Hybrid Control Designer

Controller

Operator Interface - Example is Model 1042 View

• Control Strategy Configuration

• Operator Interface Display Configuration• Operator Interface Function Key Configuration

• Configuration Upload/Download

• Test and Debug Control Strategies

• Integrate Loops of Control withDigital I/O

• Setpoint Programming

• Setpoint Scheduling

• Sequencing

• Alarm Processing• PID Control, Advanced Control,

and Auto-Tuning/Fuzzy Logic

• Boolean Logic Via Function Blocks• Advanced Math Computations

• Monitor and Control the Process

• Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Data Storage Sets,

• Provide organized, visual presentation of information• Data Storage

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Honeywell

F4

ALARM?

ESC

F3

F2

F1

•••• 0

1

4

7

2

5

8

3

6

9

_

Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture


Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup

Specifications Table 1 Specifications

Design

CE Conformity (Europe) This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed. EN61326: Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory use. EMC requirements.

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

Category II: Energy-consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation (Multiloop Process Controller). Local level appliances, and Industrial Control Equipment. (EN 61010-1)

Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (ref. IEC 664-1)

EMC Classification Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment

Operator Interface Components

Model 559 includes a Passive color LCD, 320 x 240 pixels (¼ VGA), full-function front panel keys, 3.5” 1.44 MB diskette for file load and store functions, data storage, and an optional QWERTY keyboard port.

Model 1042 Includes a TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels (Std VGA), full-function front panel keys, standard 3.5” 1.44 MB disk for file load and store functions, data storage, QWERTY keyboard port, and an optional 100 mb Zip Drive.

The OI software provides a view into the controller, and allows the user to monitor and control the process through predefined screens.

Power External 24 Vdc +/- 10% @ 1.0 amp minimum

Enclosure Material:

Model 559 Type 12: Structural Foam (Glass filled polycarbonate, UL 94V-1) Model 559-Type 4: 304 Stainless Steel Model 1042 Type 4: Bezel - 20 % glass filled polycarbonate (GE Lexan 3412R) Chassis - Zinc plated steel with Yellow Chromate coating

Dimensions:

Model 559 Type 12: Inches: 11.3 wide x 5.7 high x 5.4 deep Millimeters: 288 wide x 144 high x 136 deep

Model 559-Type 4 Inches: 9.4 wide x 6.25 high x 5.5 deep (3.5" + 2" for Plug and Cabling) Millimeters: 240 wide x 159 high x 148 deep

Model 1042 Type 4 Inches: 15.8 wide x 9.8 high x 7.2 deep Millimeters: 400 wide x 248 high x 183 deep

System Interconnection Connected to controller through its dedicated RS485 port. Maximum Distance Between Controller and OI: 601 meters (2000 feet.) Cable Type: 2 conductor with shield, Belden 9271 or equivalent Cable termination: 3 position connector at the controller end; screw type terminal strip required at OI end

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup Specifications


Performance Average Screen Update Rate: 1.0 seconds Average Data Entry Response Time: 1.5 seconds Average Screen Call-up Time: 1.5 seconds

Product Classification Class I: Fixed, Permanently Connected, Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding). (EN 61010-1)

Mounting 559 Type 12: DIN (288 x 144) compatible panel mounted. May be panel mounted (IP 54, NEMA 12) in indoor non-hazardous locations. This must be panel mounted for a Type 12 rating.

559 Type 4: Panel mounted indoor only

Model 1042 Type 4: Panel mounted only. Indoor/outdoor.

Display Model 559 Type: Color (passive LCD), 320 x 240 pixels resolution Viewing Area: 119 mm wide x 90 mm high (4.7 inches wide x 3.5 inches high)

Model 1042 Type: TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels resolution Viewing Area: 211 mm wide x 158 mm high (8.3 inches wide x 6.2 inches high)

Back-Light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) 10K Hours to half brightness

Front Panel Model 559 Keys: Membrane—22 keys 101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with front access (optional rear access on 559 Type 4 model)

Model 1042 Keys: Membrane—37 keys 101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with rear access

Disk Drive Format: 3.5 inch, 1.44 megabytes

Model 559: Standard Model 1041: Standard (120mb Zip Drive is optional)

Certifications Model 1042 CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements.

UL 3121-1, Process Control Equipment

FM Class I, Div. 2 groups A, B, C, D

Environmental Conditions

Ambient Operating Temperature

Model 559 Type 12 Model 559 Type 4 Model 1042 Type 4

32 °F to 122 °F 0 °C to 50 °C

41 °F to 126 °F 5 °C to 52 °C

Floppy drive: 32 °F to 122 °F 0 °C to 50 °C

Zip drive: 32 °F to 113 °F 0 °C to 45 °C

Ambient Storage Temperature

–4 °F to 140 °F –20 °C to 60 °C

–4 °F to 140 °F –20 °C to 60 °C

–4 °F to 140 °F –20 °C to 60 °C

Ambient Operating Relative Humidity

10 % to 90 % RH non-condensing



Ambient Storage Relative Humidity




Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup Site Preparation


Site Preparation

The cable that connects the OI to the controller module contains low voltages. Keep the cable away from

high voltage wires that can cause interference.

OI Mounting

The Operator Interface comes available in three models: Model 559 (type 12 enclosure),

Model 559 (type 4 enclosure), and Model 1042. Refer to the section for your model.

Model 559 (Type 12)

The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be mounted the following ways.

• Panel-mounted using brackets

• Panel-mounted using screws

Whichever mounting method you choose, the supplied mounting kit contains the following hardware to

secure the Operator Interface case.

Part Quantity

M6 Lock washer 2

M6 x 8 mm/0.312” long hex head screw 2

12.7 mm/0.500” long Plastite #6 screw 4

8 mm/0.312” long Plastite #6 screw 4

Mounting bracket 2

Procedures for each mounting method are given on the following pages.

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup OI Mounting


Panel mounting with brackets

The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be flush mounted in a cutout and secured using brackets supplied with the mounting kit.

Step Action

1 At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring 10.625 ± 0.030 inches by 5.190 ± 0.030 inches (269.875 ± 0.76 by 131.825 ± 0.76 millimeters). See Figure 5.

If you are mounting the Operator Interface to a side enclosure as in Figure 6, make sure the cutout allows for clearance from the enclosure’s internal panel. The left side of the rear of the Operator Interface is offset to the right to accommodate that internal panel.

2 Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel. Support the panel as shown in steps 3 and 4.

3 Refer to Figure 7. From the back of the panel, attach a mounting bracket to the top and bottom of the interface case. Insert the provided M6 hex head screw and lock washer through the slotted hole in each bracket. Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets.

4 While holding the Operator Interface firmly against the panel, slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws.

10.625

269.875

5.190

131.825

inchesDimensions = _________

millimeters

Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12



Processbeingcontrolled

EnclosurecontainingOperator InterfaceandController Module

OperatorInterface

Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12



Install Mounting Brackets

on top and bottom of caseMounting

Panel

Rear View

Insert screw in slot

Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12

Panel mounting with screws

The 559-T12 Operator Interface can also be panel mounted using screws.

ATTENTION

Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.35 inches (135.9 millimeters) behind the panel to accommodate the case of the Model 559-T12 Operator Interface.

Step Action

1 At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring

10.625 ± 0.030 inches by 5.190 ± 0.030 inches (269.875 ± 0.76 by 131.825 ± 0.76 millimeters). See Figure 8.

2 Measure and make four cutouts in the panel to accommodate the mounting screws. Refer to Figure 9 for dimensions.

3 Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel. See Figure 9.



Step Action

4 Orient the Operator Interface case against the mounting surface and attach using 4 screws from the rear.

For panels up to 3 mm (0.125”) thick, use 9.5 mm (0.375”) long Plastite screws provided.

For panels 3 mm (0.125”) to 6.4 mm (0.25”) thick, use 12.5 mm (0.5”) long Plastite screws provided.

For panels greater than 6.4 mm (0.25”) thick, tap the case holes with M3.5 or #6-32 threads and use screws of appropriate length.

5 Position the Operator Interface firmly against the panel and tighten the screws.

10.625

269.875

5.190

131.825


millimeters

3.67 + .03

93.218 + 0.76

0.76

19.3

0.156

3.96(4 places)

10.808274.52

Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12



5.35

135.9

5.669

144


millimeters

Panel

OperatorPanelCase

3.67 + 0.15

93.2 + 3.8

Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12



Model 559 (Type 4)

The 559-T4 Operator Interface must be panel mounted using the supplied hardware.

ATTENTION

Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.5 inches (140 millimeters) behind the panel to accommodate the case of the Model 559 Type 4 Operator Interface.

Step Action

1 If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure. See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.

2 See Figure 10. Make a cutout in the panel as shown. Drill 12 holes as shown.

3 Install gasket over the 12 threaded studs on the front.

4 Install spacers on each of the 12 studs. If there are 14 spacers (2 extra), install one per stud.

5 Insert Operator Interface into the panel, left side (latch side) first.

6 Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel. Attach the 12 nuts to the 12 threaded studs.

7 Tighten nuts to 12 inch-lbs. (1 ft.-lb.)

8.44

214.3

5.25 133.3

0.242 6.15

0.241

6.12

2.87 72.8

2.87

72.8

2.23

56.6

2.23

56.6

2.23

56.6 2.23 56.6

0.189 4.8

inches millimeters

Dimensions =

Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout



Model 1042

The 1042 OI case can be panel mounted using the supplied clamps.

ATTENTION

• Make sure you have a clearance of at least 7.2 inches (183 millimeters) behind the panel to accommodate the case of the 1042 OI.

• The 1042 OI must be panel mounted in a suitable enclosure to maintain the Type 4 enclosure rating. Failure to follow these mounting instructions could impair the Type 4 enclosure rating.

Table 2 Mounting

Step Action

1 If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure. See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.

2 See Figure 11. Make a cutout in the panel using cutout dimensions shown.

3 Carefully assemble the gasket into the groove molded into the back of the bezel. The adhesive side should contact the bezel.

4 Insert OI into the panel. Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel.

5 Attach the 18 mounting brackets as shown in Figure 11. Tighten the screws against the panel thereby compressing the foam gasket. Continue tightening until the back of the plastic bezel just makes contact with the panel.

Panel cutout height:8.18 ± 0.03 207.8 ± 0.8

PanelMax. thickness

7/16 11.1

Gasket between bezel and panel

Panel cutout width:

14.88 ± 0.03

378.0 ± 0.8 Attach 18 mounting brackets

as shown. Tighten screws against panel until front gasket forms a watertight seal.

Rear 1042 dimensions (W x H x D)

15.9 x 9.2 x 7.2

403 x 233 x 183

Dimensions include mounting brackets

inches millimeters

Dimensions =

Front 1042 dimensions (W x H x D)

15.8 x 9.8 x 1.1 400 x 248 x 27

Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup Wiring


Wiring

EXPLOSION HAZARD

Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Power requirement

The OI runs off an external 24 Vdc power supply. Use optional Honeywell part # 51452041-501 or any

UL/CE approved 24 Vdc 1.0A minimum supply.

Power supply mounting

You can mount the optional Honeywell power supply to the rear of the 1042 OI (Table 3). For the 559 OI,

the Honeywell power supply must be mounted separately. Otherwise, provide a 24Vdc power supply and

proceed to Table 4 Wiring.

Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting

Step Action

1 Attach rail:

On the left rear of the OI (below the wiring label), locate the two threaded holes. Using the 2 4M x 6mm screws provided, attach the DIN rail with the flanged edges facing out (see 1 and 2 in figure).

1

23

2 Attach power supply:

• Hold power supply over the rail, with tab (see 3 in figure) facing away from wiring label on OI.

• Engage the left side (as you look at figure) of the power supply with the rail, engaging the tabs on the power supply’s bottom left side.

• With tab (see 3 in figure) pulled out (use a slot screwdriver), lower the right side onto the rail and press down hard until it clicks into place.

• Push tab in until it locks.

• Grasp the power supply and rock it back and forth to check for snugness against the rail.



Step Action

3 With AC supply power disconnected, connect 3 AC supply wires (ground, positive, and neutral) to the corresponding terminals of the mounted power supply. There are two screws per terminal—use either screw.

4 Using 22-gage wire, connect wires to the mounted power supply’s COM (-) and 24V (+) terminals. These wires will connect later to the OI.

Connections

The Honeywell cable that connects the Controller to the OI is 50’ (15.42 m) long and can be cut to length. It is shielded to protect from noise. Up to 2000’ (601 m) separation can be obtained by using a Belden

cable #9271 or equivalent.

Table 4 Wiring

Step Action

1 Connect RS485 signal wiring to the controller’s 3-position terminal block as shown. If using redundant controller, repeat for each CPU’s RS485 port.

Note 1: If you are using a Honeywell OI (OI-559 or OI-1042) it must be connected to Serial Port S2 to insure proper operation of the OI. Also note that only one Honeywell OI may be connected to the controller (you cannot connect a second OI-559 or OI-1042 to Serial Port S1).

Note 2: Wiring is available from Honeywell or from third-party suppliers.

Communications Shield(Connect at controller only. Do not connect at OI.)

(-)

(+) ControllerConnector

(To Operator Interface)

2 Orient the 10-position terminal block as shown (terminals at bottom), the left terminal is RX-, the right terminal is V+. Connect wires as shown in terminal assignments (next page). (Note: Disregard wire colors shown on the back of the 1042 OI.)

Comm Signal:1 (RX-)2 (RX+)3 (Shield-do not connect) 24 Vdc Power

(+)(-)

Jumper RX- to TX-

Jumper RX+ to TX+

From controller

From power supply

10V+

1RX-

RX-

Comm Signal:RX-RX+Shield - do not connect 24 Vdc Power

(+)(-)

Jumper RX- to TX-

Jumper RX+ to TX+

From CPU-A

From power supply

V+

From CPU-B

Connection from non-redundant controller Connection from redundant controller



Step Action

Connector block terminal assignments (left to right)

Signal Name Signal Name

Receive – Receive – Receive + Receive +

Unused (do not connect) Unused (do not connect) Transmit – Transmit – Transmit + Transmit + 24VDC return 24VDC return Unused Unused

Unused Unused Unused Unused +24 Vdc +24 Vdc

3 For CE compliance attach a ferrite clamp (Honeywell Part No. 51191902-101) close to the terminals (within 1/2"). The ferrite clamp should overlap the cable shield that encloses the wires.

To prevent the clamp from sliding, attach cable ties (Honeywell Part No. 089037) snugly against each end of the clamp.

Trim the cable ties, leaving a "tail" of approximately one inch. (example is Model 1042)

Ferrite Clamp

Cable Ties

RX- V+

Ferrite Clamp

Cable Ties

RX- V+

Non-redundant controller Redundant controller



Step Action

4 Attached the assembled wiring connectors to the OI as shown. Use keyboard connector for data entry with optional AT keyboard. OI models have different connector orientations (below).

Model 1042

Power and Signal

Pin 1

Keyboard

Pin 10

559-T12 Operator Interface

Rear

559-T4 Operator Interface

Rear

Pin 1

Pin 10

Connector for power and signal

Pin 1

Pin 10

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup Noise Protection


Noise Protection

See document 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise

Environments.

Startup

After connecting the Controller and OI and applying power to the Controller, the startup display appears.

YOUR TEXT

HERESUPPORTING TEXT LINE 1

SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 2



Figure 12 Startup display

What to do if the OI has difficulty starting up

During power up the OI may get stuck in a cycle of alternating between the startup screen and shutting

down. This problem may be caused by a weak capacitor or it may occur after power has been disconnected

for an unusually long time. “Long time” depends on the condition of the capacitor, the ambient

temperature, or other factors. To correct this problem you must manually perform a “cold start.” A cold

start clears the OI memory.

Performing a cold start

Step Action

1 Turn the OI’s power off.

2 Press and hold the ESC key.

3 While holding the ESC key turn the OI’s power on. The startup screen should appear normally.

ATTENTION

If the OI has been powered OFF for more than 18 hours, the default start-up screen will display instead of the user-configured text until communications has started to the controller and the user-configured text is uploaded.


Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Keys

The Operator Interface (Figure 13) and (Figure 14) consists of standard and custom keys, a floppy drive

(optional Zip Drive for Model 1042) for storing and loading data, and an optional keyboard connector for

data entry through an AT keyboard.

KB 1 2 3 4 5

F1

F2

F3

F4

ALARM ?

ESC

Keys 1 - 5: Access up to 10 Displays each

• Help • Details • Decrement/Down • Enter • Page Down

• Main Menu • Auto/Manual • Next Digit • Escape

Keys (top to bottom) • Alarms • Tab Forward • Increment/Up • Enter • Page Up

• Display Function Keys ( pushbuttons)

Optional 3.5” Floppy drive ( rear access on Model 559 - T4

Keyboard connector ( rear access on the OI-559 T4 model )

Display

Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface

You can attach an AT keyboard to the front for easier data entry (rear access on the OI-559 T4 model).

Simply plug the keyboard into the port under the floppy drive. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

Keys and Displays Overview Overview of Keys


Honeywell

F1

F2

F3

F4 ?

ESC

ALARM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

. 0 -

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

3.5” floppy drive (standard)100 Mbyte Zip drive (optional)

Display Group keysPage UpPage Down

F1 - F4 keys (pushbuttons)

Numeric entry

Menu - Help - Alarm

Auto/Manual - Detail - Tab

Left Arrow - Decrement - Increment

Escape - Enter

Figure 14 View of 1042 OI

You can attach an AT keyboard to the rear of Model 1042 for easier data entry. Simply plug the keyboard

into the port. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

Keys and Displays Overview Standard Keys


Standard Keys

Overview

The appearance and action of the standard keys are given in Table 5. Refer to this table for direction with

any display. Unless otherwise noted, standard keys always behave as described here regardless of which

display or menu is displayed.

You can attach an AT keyboard for easier data entry. Just plug the keyboard into the port. See Table 5.

Table 5 Standard key actions

Key Key Name AT keyboard equivalent

Action

Menu Home • Accesses the Main Menu. See Overview of Displays (page 33).

?

Help End • Accesses the Help Text Displays, which contain help on various procedures. See Other Monitoring Displays (page 275).

ALARM

Alarm F3 • From the Alarm Group Display, this key acknowledges all Alarms on the page.

See NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display for Model 559 consists of two pages. Use the page Up and Down keys to view up to 3 pages of 30 Alarm Groups.

Auto/Manual F2 • On a loop display, toggles the selected loop between Automatic and Manual modes.

Detail F1 • On Loop displays, moves cursor to SP and Output.

• On Trend and Panel Displays, accesses a submenu containing further detailed functions.

• On Alarm Group display, moves cursor down a column.

Tab Tab • On multiple Loop displays, moves cursor between the loop tags on the display. Press Enter to access a more detailed display related to the selected loop tag.

• On Alarm Group display, moves cursor across a row.

Left Arrow

• When cursor is on a value or setting that can be changed, this key moves cursor one position to the left, eventually wrapping around to the rightmost position.

Decrement

• Moves cursor down a menu or list of choices. Selecting down on the last menu item sets the focus on the first menu item.

• When cursor is on a data entry field, decrements value or state.

• On a trend display, scrolls trend backward in time.

Keys and Displays Overview Standard Keys



Action

Increment

• Moves cursor up a menu or list of choices. Selecting up on the first menu item sets the focus on the last menu item.

• On a selected data entry field, increments value or state.

• On a trend display, scrolls trend forward in time.

ESC

Escape Esc • Backs you out of the current display or cursor position to the previous one. Any data entered or changes you made are not saved, except changes to a loop’s live values (output and setpoint value).

Enter Enter

• Selects the field highlighted by the green cursor, taking you to another display or enabling you to change the field’s value or setting.

• Saves a new value or setting.

Page Down Page Down

• Accesses the next page of a multi-page display.

• Accesses the next display in the sequence of the Display Group key.

Page Up Page Up

• Accesses the previous page of a multi-page display.

• Accesses the previous display in the sequence of the Display Group key.

0 thru

9

-

Numeric

Model 1042 Only

Same keys

• Facilitates easy data entry for setpoints, variables, setpoint programs, and other numeric setup parameters

Keys and Displays Overview Common Tasks Using Standard Keys


Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Table 6 Tasks using standard keys

Task Procedure

To see the Main Menu Press Menu

To move the cursor up or down any menu or list Press Increment or Decrement . Menu wrap is enabled for menus that do not scroll and disabled for scrolling menus.

To see helpful text Press Help

?.

To select a menu item to view its submenu or choices or value

With the cursor on the desired item, press Enter . The submenu appears, or the cursor moves to the right side of the display so you can select another choice or value.

To change a menu item’s value or setting Model 559/1042

With the cursor on the value or setting on the right side of

the display, press Increment and Decrement to

change a digit’s value or to see other choices. Press to move to another digit in the value.

Model 1042 only

Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9 to enter a value.

The new value or setting does not take effect until you

press Enter . If you change your mind and decide to leave the value or setting unchanged, press Escape ESC

.

To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and MANUAL Press Auto/Manual

To ignore changes you made or are about to make to a value or setting

Press Escape ESC

. The cursor moves from the right to the left side of the display, and the value or setting remains unchanged.

To back out of a display or menu or to return to a previous display or menu item Press Escape

ESC.

To see a detailed popup menu related to an operating or monitoring display (such as a trend). (An operating or monitoring display is accessed by pressing one of the keys below the display. See Other Operating Displays section and Monitoring Displays section.)

Press Detail .

AI2 2200.00 DEGF

2500.0

1500.0

07:35 07:55 08:15 08:35

SCROLLSET HOLDDETAILZOOM



Task Procedure

To manually change a control loop’s output or setpoint value

Model 1042 only: Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9

to manually enter a value. Press Enter to accept

the value, press Escape ESC

to leave it unchanged.

Model 559/1042: Press Increment or Decrement to manually select a value. Changes to a value are done “live” and do not require pressing Enter, you cannot

cancel the changes by pressing Escape ESC

.



Task Procedure

To adjust a loop’s setpoint, output, or switch between Local and Remote setpoints

Access one of the following displays:

Loop Trend:

LOOPTAG1 TUNE MAY06

11:30 AUTO RSP ENGU

PV 2205.0

OUT 83.5

SP 2000.0

DEV 205.0

2500.0

1500.0

07:35 07:55 08:15

Loop Summary:

MODE PV SP OUT

LOOPTAG1 MAN LSP 1234567 1234567 100.

LOOPTAG2 AUTO RSP 2000. 2000. 50.

LOOPTAG3 AUTO LSP 2000. 2000. 50.



LOOPTAG6 AUTO LSP 2000. 2000. 50.

LOOPTAG7 MAN LSP 2000. 2000. 50.

LOOPTAG8 MAN LSP 2000. 2000. 50.

LOOP SUMMARY

2, 3, 4, or 8 Multi-Loop Faceplates:

Single Loop Numeric:

LOOPTAG1

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0SP 2000.0OUT 83.5

AUTO LSP

LOOPTAG2

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0SP 2000.0OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG3

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0SP 2000.0OUT 83.5

MAN LSP

LOOPTAG12500.0

1500.0

AUTO LSP TUNE

AL1 AL2

PV

2205.0 ENGU

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5 %

Notice these displays have a cursor around the loop tag

at the top of the display. Press Tab to move cursor

to the desired loop tag. Press Detail to move between the loop tag, SP value, and Output value (if in Manual). Adjust values as in previous task in this table.

With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter to jump to that loop’s control screen:

TYPE PID

PV 1234567

OUTPUT 1234567

LOCAL SP 1234567

REMOTE SP 1234567

SWITCH SP

LOOP CONTROL

LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU

See Loop control (page 121).

To see an overview list of alarms Press Alarm ALARM

To acknowledge all alarms in the currently displayed group of alarms (up to 12 alarms) Press Alarm ALARM



Task Procedure

To see other operating and monitoring displays Up to 10 displays can be accessed with each Display

Group key. Press Page Up and Page Down to see other displays assigned to a key.

To scroll backward and forward in time through vertical or horizontal trends

With a trend display, press Increment or Decrement

. Or, press Detail to show the popup menu. For other trend actions, see Trend Displays (page 266).

Keys and Displays Overview User-assignable Keys


User-assignable Keys

The function and factory-shipped appearance of the user-assignable keys is described in Table 7. A display

group key's appearance can be changed [see Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31)] so their appearance

may vary from Table 6 and Figure 13 and Figure 14. Specific functions of these keys are programmed

with the Hybrid Control Designer, a tool for configuring the OI for its end user.

Keys F1-F4

The keys F1-F4 are active on certain user-assignable displays and on a few standard displays. The use of

the keys is explained with the displays in which they are used. For all other displays these keys are

inactive.

Display Group keys 1-5 (Model 1042, keys 1- 8)

Each Display Group Key can be programmed to access up to 10 operating and monitoring displays. Refer

to Other Operating Displays section and Monitoring Displays section for descriptions and tasks related to

these displays. Model 1042 has 8 Display Group Keys, and Model 559 has 5 keys. These keys are located

along the bottom of the Operator Interface, as shown in Figure 13 and Figure 14.

Task Procedure

To see the last display shown from this group Press the desired Display Group key.

To see the next or previous display assigned to a key Press Page Down or Page Up.

Keys and Displays Overview User-assignable Keys


Table 7 User-assignable key actions


Action

F1

Pushbutton 1 F5 The use of the F1 - F4 keys are discussed throughout the manual for the displays in which they are used.

F2

Pushbutton 2

F6

F3

Pushbutton 3

F7

F4

Pushbutton 4

F8

1

Display Group 1

F9 Each Display Group key displays the last display shown from a group of up to ten pre-configured operating and monitoring displays.

Press Page Up or Page Down to show the next display in the key’s sequence, eventually wrapping around to the first display.

2

Display Group 2

F10

3

Display Group 3

F11

4

Display Group 4

F12

5

Display Group 5

F4

6

Display Group 6 Shift + F10

7

Display Group 7 Shift + F11 MODEL 1042 ONLY

8

Display Group 8 Shift + F12

Keys and Displays Overview Relabeling Display Group Keys


Relabeling Display Group Keys

You may customize the appearance of the Display Group keys 1-5[8] by giving them names that describe

your application. For example, if you have configured Display Group #1 key to show all the Loop displays,

you could replace the label "1"with a more descriptive label like LOOPS.

Step Action

1 All models: Disconnect power or disconnect the cable from the rear of the Operator Interface.

2 Model 559 Type 12: Unscrew the bolts under the floppy drive cover on the right front.

Model 559 Type 4: Remove the 4 screws on the left and right sides of the unit.

Model 1042: Remove the 4 screws on the rear of the unit.

3 Model 559 Type 12: Pry off the right side of the front, towards you, as if opening a door. The left side will remain engaged on hinge-like appendages.

Model 559 Type 4: Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.

Model 1042: Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.

4 Model 559: Disengage the left side by pulling the front out and to the right. Be careful not to stretch or break attached wires and cables.

5 All models: Disconnect all wires and cables connected to the front.

6 All models: Looking at the rear of the front you just removed; notice the slots containing the labels for the keys. Remove the labels by pulling them out.

7 All models: Create new label strips from clear or white plastic. Most word processors on a personal computer let you create custom documents. Use the dimensions shown in Figure 15 and Figure 16 and keep text or symbols within the boxes shown. Round off the corners of the strip to allow easy insertion.

8 All models: To replace the labels, reverse steps 1 through 6. If you have difficulty inserting the new label, try gripping it with needle nose pliers and inserting it.

Keys and Displays Overview Relabeling Display Group Keys


16 5/8”10 3/8”

119 4 5/8”

13 1/2”

158 6 1/4”

14 9/16”

2 1/16”

39 1 5/8”

Key:mm inches

Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions

3/8

10

3/16

4.7

Dimensions =Inchesmillimeters

5/8

16

0.05

13

9/16

14

3.0

76

6 13/16

173

3 13/16 97

1 2 3 4

Note: There are 2 labels of 4 keys each

Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions

Keys and Displays Overview Overview of Displays


Overview of Displays

Display areas defined

Displays have certain areas in common. See Figure 17 and Table 8.

Title

PAGE N OF M Time:Date

Body of Display

Contains menu orgraphics

ALARM D MESSAGE TXT EVENT SHZ RUN

Figure 17 Display areas defined

Table 8 Display areas defined details

Area of Display Purpose/Description

Title Describes display contents.

PAGE N OF M Current page number of the active display. Appears when more information is accessible through Page Up and Page Down keys.

Indicates there is more information off screen. Press Increment or Decrement keys to scroll to more information.

Time: Date Time and Date

Body of Display Area between the title and the bottom area contains graphical data or a text menu.

ALARM Red. Indicates an alarm exists. When flashing, indicates an alarm is unacknowledged. See Alarms section.

D Blue. Indicates a diagnostic exists. See Diagnostics (page 142).

MESSAGE TXT Blue: Diagnostic message. See Diagnostics (page 142).

Green: Data Storage message. See Messages (page 279).

EVENT Yellow: User-configured events.



Area of Display Purpose/Description

RUN Controller’s mode of operation:

RUN: Controller is running normally. PROG: Controller is in Program mode. OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode. FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch. NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding or briefly during mode changes or during hot or cold starts. RUN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress. PROG (flashing green): Download to OI in progress. This is not a controller cold start. OFLN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress.

Flashing green mode indicator can also mean one of the following changes are being downloaded to the controller:

• New language

• New filename prefix

• New security settings

• New Data Storage Setting (.DSS)

• New recipe, profile, schedule, or sequence

S H Z Indicates special conditions are in effect for this display.

Storage: Data Storage is actively collecting data and saving it to the floppy disk or to the internal buffer. See Data Storage section.

Hold: A display that usually rotates through several points is on Hold on a single point. See Hold in Table 168.

Zoom: A trend display is in zoom (magnification) view mode. See Zoom in Table 168.

Display organization

Displays are accessed according to the following hierarchy. Notice that the keys in Figure 18 give you

direct access to displays. The remaining keys let you navigate within displays and switch to other displays.

NOTE: Model 1042 has eight Display Group keys and a numeric keypad.

Model 559 has five Display Groups and no numeric keypad.



? 2 8 ALARM

.

.

.

1

USER-DEFINED DISPLAY #1

Trend, bar graph, loop, setpoint program, alarms, recipes, sequencer, scheduler, pushbuttons, panel, overview, messages.

MAIN MENU Access to loops, recipes, setpoints , I/O summary, variables, storage, utilities.

MESSAGES Up to 10 pages of helpful messages.

ALARM SUMMARY Shows status of all alarm groups.

ALARM GROUP Shows individual status of each alarm in a group.

ALARM GROUP Shows individual status of each alarm in a group.



.

.

.







.

.

.







.

.

.



. . . 5 1042

559

Figure 18 Display organization

Standard and user-assignable displays

Standard displays are accessed under the Menu key, that is, they are not user-assignable. They contain

textual descriptions of functions you can choose from. See Main Menu tree in Table 11.

User-assignable displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer configuration tool and are

accessed with the Display Group keys 1

through 5

[8

] . See Table 9.

User-assignable displays

The displays accessed under the Display Group keys 1

through 5

[8

] are assigned to those keys

using the Hybrid Control Designer tool.

TIP

Since the Display Group keys are selectable in the Hybrid Control Designer, consider taking advantage of this feature by grouping related displays under each Display Group key. For example, on each key you can configure a sequence of 10 displays in order of importance to the process. You can also configure Help text (messages) to appear on these keys.



Table 9 shows all displays that can be assigned to keys 1

through 5

[8

]. Each item is subordinate

to the item to its left or upper left.

Table 9 User-assignable displays

See Page Top level Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

119 Loops:

ILOOP SUMMARY LOOP CONTROL

8-LOOPS LOOP CONTROL




1-LOOP NUMERIC LOOP CONTROL

LOOP W/TREND LOOP CONTROL

AUTO/MANUAL BIAS LOOP CONTROL

45 Recipes:

LOAD RECIPE

53 Set point programmers:

SPP OPERATE (1) LOAD LOAD PROGRAM LOAD PROGRAM

FROM LIST

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE

74 Set point schedulers:

SPS OPERATE LOAD LOAD SCHEDULE LOAD SCHEDULE

FROM LIST

CLEAR

VIEW EVENTS

VIEW AUX

EDIT

SAVE

87 Sequencer

SEQUENCER OPERATE VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE EDIT STEP DETAILS EDIT STEPS

VIEW STEP DETAILS

LOAD SEQUENCE LOAD SEQUENCE LOAD SEQUENCE

FROM LIST

EDIT STEPS

SAVE SEQUENCE

CLEAR SEQUENCER




231 Data Storage

DATA STORAGE

STATUS

241 Other operating displays:

Pushbuttons F1-F4:

PUSHBUTTONS

SELECTOR SWITCHES SWITCH CONTROL

DEVICE CONTROL

OPERATE

EDIT DEVICE

HOA SWITCH SET HOA SWITCH

Other:

STAGE OPERATE EDIT STAGE MENU EDIT STAGE

RAMP OPERATE EDIT RAMP MENU EDIT RAMP

ALTERNATOR

OPERATE

EDIT ALTERNATOR EDIT OUTPUT

SELECTIONS

EDIT INPUT

SELECTIONS

EDIT OUTPUT

SEQUENCE

266 Trends:

VERTICAL TREND

VERTICAL TREND

W/HORIZ. BARS

HORIZ. TREND

HORIZ. TREND

W/DIGITALS

HORIZ. TRENDS

W/VERT. BARS




270 Bar graphs:

3 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS

6 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS

3 VERT. BAR GRAPHS

6 VERT. BAR GRAPHS

271 Panels:

SINGLE PT. ROTATING

PANEL

MULTI-PT (4) PANEL

MULTI-PT (7) PANEL

12-PT PANEL METER

OVERVIEW

ALARM GROUP ALARM DETAILS

275 Other

MESSAGE TEXT

Main Menu Overview


Main Menu

Overview

What is the Main Menu?

The Main Menu is accessed any time from any display by pressing Menu . It contains functions for

setting up or adjusting the controller for operation. For example, you can tune control loops, view events,

edit setpoint profiles, calibrate analog inputs or analog outputs, and load and store profiles and recipes.

ATTENTION

The 559 and 1042 have different menu structures. Program must be in READY state to be edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related screens on the 559 since there is more display space available

Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.

Table 6 describes how to use the keys to interact with all the menus.

Table 10 explains the Main Menu functions

Table 10 Top level functions of main menu

Menu Item Function

Recipes View, load, and edit recipes. A recipe is a group of variables whose values are changed when the recipe is loaded.

SP Programmers Adjust and set up setpoint programs. A setpoint program is a time-varying setpoint and associated discrete states.

SP Schedulers Adjust and set up setpoint schedules. A setpoint schedule is a sequence of segments, where each segment contains multiple setpoints, auxiliary outputs, and events.

Sequencers Adjust and set up sequences. A sequence can be a very rigid series of inter-related events used to start-up or shut-down a unit process, or it can be a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product.

Loops Adjust and set up control loops.

Alarms/Events/ Diags

View status of alarms, events, and diagnostics.

Summary Displays Review I/O summaries and variables in the controller’s configuration.

Unit Setup Perform unit maintenance activities such as calibrating inputs and outputs, setting security, and testing the instrument’s functions.

Disk Utilities Load and store disk files.

Data Storage Store process data to the disk.

Log Off Secure the instrument when leaving it unattended.

Main Menu Overview


Main menu tree

Access the Main Menu by pressing . The menu is organized as shown in Table 11.

For more details on a top-level item, go to the specified page.

ATTENTION

The 559 and 1042 have different menu structures. Program must be in READY state to be edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related screens on the 559 since there is more display space available

Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.

Table 11 Main menu tree


44 RECIPES SELECT RECIPE EDIT EDIT RECIPE

LOAD

46 SP PROGRAMMERS SELECT PROGRAM EDIT PROGRAM EDIT SEGMENT EDIT SEG>EVENTS

SAVE PROGRAM

65 SP SCHEDULERS SELECT SCHEDULE EDIT SCHEDULE EDIT SEGMENTS EDIT SETPOINTS

EDIT EVENTS

EDIT GUAR HOLD

SAVE SCHEDULE

EDIT GUAR HOLD

LIMITS

87 SEQUENCERS SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT SEQUENCE EDIT STEPS EDIT STEP DETAILS

VIEW STEP DETAILS

SAVE SEQUENCE

103 LOOPS SELECT LOOP LOOP TREND LOOP TUNE

CONSTANTS

ACCUTUNE or

ACCUTUNE I I I TUNING STATUS

LOOP TUNE

CONSTANTS

CONTROL SETUP

CARBON LOOP SETUP

ALARM SETPOINTS

LIMITS

HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING

Main Menu Overview



129 SUMMARY DISPLAYS ANALOG INPUT

SUMMARY

ANALOG OUTPUT

SUMMARY

DIGITAL INPUT

SUMMARY

DIGITAL OUTPUT

SUMMARY

VARIABLE SUMMARY

ALARM/EVENT/DIAG For HC900-C70R Redundant Controller – See Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller

Displays

137

ALARM SUMMARY ALARM GROUP ALARM DETAIL

141 EVENT SUMMARY

142 CONTROLLER

DIAGNOSTICS

I/O MODULE

DIAGNOSTICS

MODULE DETAILS

COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION PORT

OI PORT

NETWORK PORT VIEW HOST

CONNECTIONS

VIEW PEER

CONNECTIONS

EXPANSION IO PORT

I/O MODULE

DIAGNOSTICS

MODULE DETAILS

PANEL DIAGNOSTIC

LOG

Main Menu Overview



159 UNIT SETUP

Attention:

For additional selections for

the HC900 Redundant

Controller – See

Appendix A - HC900-

C70R Redundant

Controller Displays

CONTROLLER STATUS

SET MODE

SET TIME AND DATE

SET SECURITY

REVIEW SECURITY

SET LANGUAGE*

COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION PORT

OI PORT

NETWORK PORT VIEW HOST

CONNECTIONS

NETWORK HOST

STATISTICS

VIEW PEER

CONNECTIONS

NETWORK PEER

STATISTICS

EXPANSION I/O PORT

FILE NAME SELECTIONS

SELF TESTS KEYBOARD TEST

DISPLAY TEST

DISK TEST

CALIBRATE AI SET CONTROLLER

MODE

CALIBRATE CHANNEL

CALIBRATE CJ TEMP

RESTORE AI FACTORY

CAL

RESTORE CJ FACTORY

CAL

CALIBRATE AO SET CONTROLLER

MODE

CALIBRATE AO

CHANNEL

RESTORE AO CAL

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

*Model 1042 only.

Main Menu Overview



208 DISK UTILITIES LIST DISK FILES

LOAD/STORE PROFILES LOAD LOAD FROM DISK

STORE STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE RECIPES LOAD LOAD FROM DISK

STORE STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE

SCHEDULES

LOAD LOAD FROM DISK

STORE STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE

SEQUENCES

LOAD LOAD FROM DISK

STORE STORE TO DISK

FORMAT DISK

SET CONTROLLER

MODE

STORAGE STATUS

STORAGE CONTROLS

221 DATA STORAGE INITIALIZE STORAGE

DISK

LOAD STORAGE

SETTINGS

VIEW STORAGE

SETTINGS

TREND 1 STORAGE

TREND 2 STORAGE

POINT LOG STORAGE

ALARM/EVENT

STORAGE

START NEW STORAGE

SETTINGS

STORE STORAGE

SETTINGS

239 LOG OFF

Recipes Overview


Recipes

Access

Main menu.

Load Recipe is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.

Description

A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe, the values or states

of the variables in the recipe replace the values of those variables in the controller’s configuration.

Procedure

Select a recipe to edit or load. Select Cancel to return to the Main Menu.

Edit/View recipe

A recipe’s variable is analog or digital. The setting for an analog point can be any numerical value, and a

digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.

Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, recipe editing can be disabled via the HC Designer

configuration software. If recipe editing has been disabled you will still be able to view the contents of any

recipe using the VIEW selection.

Table 12 Recipe edit/view details

Feature Description

TAGNAME n The name of the variable in the recipe.

Value or State Indicates the current value or state of the variable. Press Enter to edit.

Engineering Units The engineering units associated with the variable.

Page number Indicates multiple pages

DESCRIPTOR(1042) Optional descriptor of recipe. If descriptor not entered, TAGNAME is repeated.

Recipes Overview


Load recipe

This display is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.

Select Load to load the recipe into the controller configuration. A message confirms when the load is

completed.

TIP

When you load a recipe, you are in effect writing new values to those variables in the configuration. Be aware that the controller configuration may contain a Recipe Load function block that, without your knowledge, can load a second recipe after you loaded one here. If this second recipe is loaded, the values you just loaded may be overwritten by different values. The effect is that some or all of the recipe values or states you intended to load are not in effect.

To check that your recipe load took effect, after loading a recipe you can view the variables to see they are set to the desired recipe values or states. See Summary Displays (page 129).

If a recipe’s variables do not seem to be loading properly, consider reconfiguring the controller to eliminate the Recipe Load function block that is causing the conflict.


Setpoint Programmers

Overview

Access

Main menu.

Description

A setpoint programmer supplies a time-varying setpoint to a control loop. A program contains multiple

segments; each segment can be a ramp or a soak and has digital switches called “events.” This menu lets

you edit setpoint program segments, segment events, or other parameters and save the changes to the

controller’s memory.

Each program contains multiple segments. Each segment of the program may be a ramp or soak except the

last segment must be a soak.

Multiple programs can be running concurrently. Programmers can run any of the profiles in controller

memory. Once loaded from memory into the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) function, these profiles are

referred to as “programs.” Any program can be edited and saved as a profile in one of the “slots” in the

controller’s memory.

In addition to the main output value, a second analog value is available for each step of the program. This

output is a fixed soak value, which may be used as an input to another function or to provide a setpoint

value for a secondary control loop in the process.

A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the program if a process

variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Selections allow setpoint guarantee to be active for

the entire program, for soak segments only, or for user specified segments.

Up to 3 Process Variables may be configured as inputs to the block for setpoint guarantee.

The program may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator

as well as by inputs to the SPP block. Table 13 lists the resulting states.

Table 13 SPP inputs and current state

Input Current State

READY HOLD RUN GHOLD STOP

RESET READY READY RUN READY READY

HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD STOP

RUN RUN RUN RUN GHOLD STOP

GHOLD READY HOLD GHOLD GHOLD STOP

With regard to changing program state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution

cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.

Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel, which occur during the same

execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the “last

change wins.”

Setpoint Programmers Setpoint Program Setup


Setpoint Program Setup

Access

Setpoint Program setup is done through the SP Programmers Menu, accessed through the Main Menu.

Press "Enter" for Select Program menu. Press "Enter" again to Edit Program.

See also

While operating Setpoint Program functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.

What’s in this section

Topic See Page

Select Program 48

Edit Program 49

Edit Program Segments 51

Save Program 52

Setpoint Programmers Select program


Select program

Select a program to edit. The Edit Program menu is then displayed.

NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.

TIP

Program must be in READY to be edited.

See also

While operating Setpoint Programming functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.

Setpoint Programmers Edit program


Edit program

This display lets you edit parameters of the selected program. Edits affect only the currently working

program, not the profile in memory, unless you save the program.

ATTENTION

Program must be in READY state to be edited.

Table 14 Edit program details

Feature Description

EDIT SEGMENTS Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 51) where you can edit each segment.

SAVE PROGRAM Saves changes you make to this display. Program is saved in the controller’s profile memory where it can be loaded and run later.

LABEL, DESCRIPTION Identifies the program with text.

RAMP TYPE TIME: Each ramp segment’s time is the TIME allotted to the profile’s output to reach the next soak segment’s value in hours or minutes.

OR

RATE: Each ramp segment’s time specifies the RATE at which that profile’s output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.

Make this selection before entering any Ramp during Profile Edit.

NOTE: When Ramp unit is configured for TIME, entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.

TIME UNITS This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the ramp type selected.

For Time ramp type: Time = Hours or Minutes

For Rate ramp type: Rate = EU/Hour or EU/Minutes

PRIMARY OUTPUT LABEL Label associated with the PV.

PRIMARY ENG UNITS Engineering Units of the PV

GUAR HOLD TYPE Guaranteed Hold, if enabled here, will hold the profile value if a PV to the profile (typically a control loop’s PV) deviates specified amounts above or below the profile output.

None: No segments have guaranteed hold enabled.

Per Seg: Lets you select specific segments for guaranteed hold where you set up the profile ramps and soaks.

All Soaks: All soak segments will have a guaranteed hold enabled.

All Segs: All segments will have guaranteed hold enabled.

GUAR HOLD LO LIM The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount below the profile setpoint.

Setpoint Programmers Edit program


Feature Description

GUAR HOLD HI LIM The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount above the profile setpoint.

LOOP START SEGMENT The first segment of the loop.

LOOP END SEGMENT The last segment of the loop.

LOOP CYCLES Number of times the loop segments will execute. Zero (0) means the segments will be repeated forever.

JOG SEGMENT Segment to which the program will jump to when the JOG discrete input is pulsed.

RESTART RATE This recovery ramp rate is provided in the event of a power loss while a program is running. The Restart Rate value is used to return the process to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss.

AUX OUT LABEL A second analog value is available for each segment of the program. It is a fixed soak value and can be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process.

Enter up to 8 characters for the label.

AUX ENG UNITS Up to 4 characters. This is the engineering unit text associated with the AUX OUT.

FAST FORWARD Fast Forward is a way to check for proper functioning of the profile’s events and outputs, without having to wait for the profile to execute at its normal speed. When FAST FORWARD is ON, the program will run at a speed 60 times faster. When FAST FORWARD is OFF, the program will run at normal speed.

Setpoint Programmers Edit segments


Edit segments

This menu lets you specify segment parameters.

Table 15 Edit segment details

Feature Description

F1 – NEXT SEG Press F1 to edit next segment.

F2 – PREV SEG Press F2 to edit previous segment.

EDITING PROGRAM # Number of program being edited and its label.

SEGMENT # Segment being edited.

SEGMENT TYPE Ramp or Soak. Last segment must be a soak.

STARTING VALUE Starting value of the segment.

TIME/RATE Range = 0.00 hr. to 999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 999.99 min. The function of this value depends on the Ramp Type (see Table 14).

GUAR HOLD Select ON to enable setpoint guarantee if GHOLD is Per Segment.

AUX START VALUE Select a fixed soak value for this segment.

EVENTS Model 559: Select "EVENTS" to access the Edit Segment Events menu.

Model 1042: Edit the segment events on this display (ON or OFF).

Edit Segment Events

You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment

events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains

ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the

next segment. Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable

is outside the guaranteed soak band. Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if

the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint.

TIP

Events can be edited only while program is in READY state.

Setpoint Programmers Save program


Save program

This function saves a program to the controller’s profile memory. A programmer can run any of the

profiles in controller memory. Once loaded from controller memory into the Setpoint Programmer function,

these profiles are known as programs. You can choose to save a program (profile) back to controller

memory after editing it. See Figure 19.

Table 16 Save Program details

Feature Description

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER CURRENT PROFILE NAME CURRENT PROFILE DESCR

The number, name, and description of the profile currently loaded into the programmer.

SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER There are multiple “slots” available in memory for profiles.

ATTENTION: You will overwrite any profile in the slot. Select the desired slot and press Enter to save the profile. The profile is also saved in the program.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Program function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Program function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

Bold items are read only.

Profiles in RAM

Profile #1

Profile #2

Profile #3

.

.

.

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 3SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER 2

SAVE PROGRAM 1

Program #1 is saved as

Profile #2 in RAM

Select SAVE*

Step 1

Step 2

Select SAVE TO

PROFILE NUMBER 2

Profiles in RAM

Profile #1

Profile #2

Profile #3.

.

.

Profile #3 was

previously

loaded into SP

Program #1.

Step 4

Step 3

Step 5Program #1 now contains

Profile #2.

ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT RUNS H Z

STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP RUN 3 2

PRIMARY AUXLABEL

PV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU

SP 1449.0 ENGU 31.1 ENGU

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME 0001:30:00

ELAPSED PGM TIME 0006:00:00

SEG TIME REMAIN 0000:10:00

PV2 0

PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 05

11:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

EV1 OFF EV9 OFFEV1 OFF EV9 OFFEV1 OFF EV9 OFFEV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFFEV1 OFF EV9 OFF



STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP RUN 2 2 PRIMARY AUXLABEL






PV2 0

PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 0511:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

* On Model 559, select

"More Commands"

then SAVE in the dialog box.

Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042

Setpoint Programmers Setpoint Program Operation


Setpoint Program Operation

Overview

Setpoint program operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 5

[8

]

Selection of display formats is performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are

described in this section.

See also

While performing setpoint program operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.


Topic See Page

Single SP Program Operation - Model 1042 54

Single SP Program Operation - Model 559 56

Operate Popup Menu (More Commands) - Model 559 58

View Program Events - Model 559 59

View Program Details -- Model 559 60

Load Program 60

Edit Segments 63

Security

When Security is enabled (see “Set Security”), the SPP operate display works as follows:

When the display is initially called, the security pop-up appears. Enter the proper security code then re-

select the function. Access is permitted without further interruption of the security pop-up until the

display is removed from view.

Setpoint Programmers SPP operation - Model 1042


SPP operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.

It includes SPP Operate details as well as Program Event details on one screen.

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1Date11:30

F4

ADV

RUN

F3

RESET

F2

HOLD

F1

RUN

PRIMARY AUXLABELPV 1450.0 31.0SP 1449.0 31.1


PGM ELAPSED TIME 02:00:00

STATE PROF SEG SOAK RUN # 3 # 2

ELAPSED SEG TIME 00:30:00

PV2 0.0

PV3 0.0

EV1 OFF EV9 OFFEV2 OFF EV10 OFFEV3 OFF EV11 OFFEV4 OFF EV12 OFFEV5 OFF EV13 OFFEV6 OFF EV14 OFFEV7 OFF EV15 OFFEV8 OFF EV16 OFF

LOADCLEAREDITSAVE

MYPROFIL MY TEST PROFILE

Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042

Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042

Feature Description

SPTAG1 Name of the selected programmer block.

MYPROFIL Name of the selected profile.

MY TEST PROFILE Description of the selected profile.

STATE READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All events are OFF.

HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.

RUN: Profile is executing normally.

GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.

STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.

DISABLE: Profile is prevented from starting until the programmer disable control is ON.

PROFILE Profile # is the memory location of this profile.

SEGMENT Current segment

RAMP or SOAK

Type of current segment: ramp or soak

Current segment, next segment indicators.

Left box: current segment type.

Right box: next segment type.

Ramp up Soak

Ramp down Blank

In Ready state, there are no segment type indicators displayed.



Feature Description

PRIMARY PV Value of PV.

PRIMARY SP Value of setpoint.

ELAPSED SEG TIME Time elapsed in the segment

ELAPSED PGM TIME Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SEG TIME REMAIN Time remaining in the indicated segment.

PV2 Process Variable #2 value, for deviation check.


LOAD Accesses the Load Program display. See Load program (Page 60). Program must be in READY state.

CLEAR Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.

EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu. See

Edit segments (Page 63 ). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE Accesses the Save Program display. See Save Program (Page 52) Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

EVENT # State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

F1

RUN

Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.

F2

HOLD

Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

F3

RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment. Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See SAVE on the display.

F4

ADV

Push F4 button to cause the program to jump to the next segment.

When the program is already in the last segment, the advance request is ignored.

Programs cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must either READY or HOLD.

Bold items are read-only.



SPP operation - Model 559

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.

MYPROFILE

STATE PROF SEG RAMP RUN # 3 # 2

PRIMARY AUXLABEL ENGU ENGU

PV 1450.0 31.0SP 1449.0 31.1

SEG TIME REM 01:30:00


LOADMORE COMMANDS

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

MY TEST PROFILE

Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559

Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559

Feature Description

MY PROFIL Name of the selected profile.


STATE READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All events are OFF.

HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.

RUN: Profile is executing normally.

GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.

STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.

PROF Profile # is the memory location, 1 to 70, of this profile.

SEG Current segment

RAMP or SOAK

Type of current segment: ramp or soak



Feature Description

Current segment, next segment indicators.

Left box: current segment type.

Right box: next segment type.

Ramp up

Soak

Ramp down

Blank

In Ready state, there are no segment type boxes displayed.

PRIMARY PV Value of PV.

PRIMARY SP Value of setpoint.

AUXILIARY PV (AUX LABEL) Value of auxiliary PV.

AUXILIARY SP (AUX LABEL) Value of auxiliary setpoint.

SEG TIME REM Time remaining in the indicated segment.

PGM ELAPSED TIME Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

LOAD Accesses the Load Program display. See Load Program (Page 60). Program must be in READY state.

MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate menu. See SPP operate popup menu (Page 58).

F1

RUN

Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.

F2

HOLD

Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

F3

RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment. Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 22).

F4

ADV

Push F4 button to cause the program to jump to the next segment.

When the program is already in the last segment, the advance request is ignored.

Programs cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must either READY or HOLD.




SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

This menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the program. Some actions require the program to be in

certain states (RUN, READY, etc.).

For Model 1042 Operate details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

MYPROFIL



PV 1450.0 31.0

SP 1449.0 31.1

SEG TIME REM 01:30:00PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00

LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 11:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

CLEAR

VIEW EVENTS

VIEW DETAILEDIT

SAVE

MY TEST PROFILE

Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559

Feature Description

CLEAR Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.

VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See View program events (page 59).

VIEW DETAIL Displays detailed information on the program. See View program detail (page 60).

EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu. See

Edit segments (page 63). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE Accesses the Save Program display See Save Program (Page 52). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the program is in that state. NA means

the action is not available in that state.



Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state

Program State

Action READY RUN HOLD GHOLD STOP DISABLE

CLEAR X NA NA NA NA NA

EDIT X NA X NA X NA

SAVE X NA X NA X NA

View program events - Model 559

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.

For Model 1042 Events - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

MYPROFIL


EVENT #1 OFF EVENT #9 ON

EVENT #2 OFF EVENT #10 OFF

EVENT #3 OFF EVENT #11 ONEVENT #4 ON EVENT #12 ON


EVENT #6 ON EVENT #14 ON




SEG TIME REM 0:00

MY TEST PROFILE

Figure 23 View program events - Model 559

Table 21 View program events details - Model 559

Feature Description

MY PROFILE Name of the selected profile.


STATE Current state of program.

PROF # Profile # is the memory location of this profile

SEG # Current segment

RAMP or SOAK Type of current Segment: Ramp or Soak

EVENT # State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

SEG TIME REM Time remaining in the indicated segment.


Setpoint Programmers Load program


View program details - Model 559

This display lets you see details on the program time and auxiliary PVs.

For Model 1042 Program Details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

MYPROFIL



PV 1450.0 31.0SP 1449.0 31.1



LOADMORE COMMANDS

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

PV 2 2207.23PV 3 2203.92ELAPSED SEG TIME 1:15:45ELAPSED PGM TIME 10:36:01SEG TIME REMAIN 0:45:15

MY TEST PROFILE

Figure 24 View program details - Model 559

Table 22 View program details- Model 559

Feature Description



ELAPSED SEG TIME # Time elapsed in the indicated segment.

ELAPSED PGM TIME # Time elapsed in the program.

SEG TIME REMAIN Time remaining in the indicated segment.


Load program

This menu lets you load a program from memory, using a profile number or selecting from a profile list,

into a setpoint programmer where it can be run or edited.

Table 23 Program load details

Feature Description

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER Number of program being run by the programmer.

CURRENT PROFILE NAME Name of program being run by the programmer.

CURRENT PROFILE DESCR Description of program being run by the programmer.

LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER Number of profile to be loaded from memory. Load profile number 0 (zero) will clear the working program. See Figure 25.

LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST Profile number selected from a list of profiles that appears will be loaded from memory. See Figure 26.



Feature Description

SEGMENT NUMBER After loading, the program will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a loop, the profile cycles through the looped segments according to the number of loop cycles.


Profiles in RAM.

Profile #1

Profile #2

Profile #3

. . .

Program #1

contains Profile #1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Select LOAD FROM

PROFILE NUMBER

and

SEGMENT NUMBER.

Profile #3 is loaded from RAM

to Program #1. Program

will start at Segment #5 during

its first run. Subsequent

runs always start at Segment

#1.

Select LOAD


STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP RUN 1 1 PRIMARY AUXLABELPV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU





PV2 0

PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE


F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF


EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF



PRIMARY AUXLABEL






PV2 0PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAREDIT

SAVE


F1

RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4

ADV


EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF


EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 1CURRENT PROFILE NAME MYPROFILCURRENT PROFILE DESCR MY TEST PROFILELOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER 3LOAD FROM PROFILE LISTSEGMENT NUMBER 5


LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

`

Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042



Program #1

contains Profile #1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Select LOAD FROM

PROFILE LIST

and

SEGMENT NUMBER.

Profile #3 is loaded from RAMto Program #1. Program

will start at Segment #5 during

its first run. Subsequent

runs always start at Segment

#1.

Select LOAD



PRIMARY AUXLABELPV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU





PV2 0

PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE


F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF



STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP RUN 3 5 PRIMARY AUXLABELPV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU



ELAPSED PGM TIME 0006:00:00SEG TIME REMAIN 0000:10:00

PV2 0

PV3 0

LOAD

CLEAR

EDIT

SAVE

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 05

11:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF


EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

EV1 OFF EV9 OFF


EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

1 PROFILE NAME2 PROFILE NAME3 PROFILE NAME4 PROFILE NAME5 PROFILE NAME6 PROFILE NAME7 PROFILE NAME8 PROFILE NAME9 PROFILE NAME10 PROFILE NAME

PROFILES IN MEMORY

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 1

CURRENT PROFILE NAME MYPROFILCURRENT PROFILE DESCR MY TEST PROFILELOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER 3

LOAD FROM PROFILE LISTSEGMENT NUMBER 5


LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

`

Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042



Edit segments

This menu lets you edit the profile segments of the working program. Edits do not affect profiles in

memory unless you save them.

ATTENTION

Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.

Table 24 Edit segments details

Feature Description

F1 - NEXT SEG Press F1 to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG Press F2 to edit previous segment.

REFERENCE PROFILE Number, label, and description of program being edited.


SEGMENT TYPE Ramp or Soak

TIME UNITS Time units of the profile. Minutes or Hours.

RAMP TYPE TIME: Each ramp segment’s time is the TIME allotted to the profile’s output to reach the next soak segment’s value in hours or minutes.

OR

RATE: Each ramp segment’s time specifies the RATE at which that profile’s output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.

STARTING VALUE Starting value of the segment.

TIME/RATE Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.99 min. The function of this value depends on the Ramp Type.

AUX START VALUE Select a fixed soak value for this segment.




TIP

• Edits are allowed to any segment of the program, including the current segment.

• If edit is to current segment and segment is a ramp:

- If the ramp type is edited, then the time remaining is recalculated and the ramp rate is adjusted accordingly.

- If the ramp rate is edited, then the time remaining is adjusted accordingly.

- Changes to the ramp starting setpoint will be ignored for the current execution of the segment, but will be used for subsequent execution if the segment is included in a loop.

• If edit is to current segment and segment is a soak:

- Changes to the soak setpoint will result in a step change.

- Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is less than or equal to 0, the program will advance to the next segment upon returning to RUN state.

• If the current segment is a ramp and the starting value of the following segment is changed, then the time remaining in the ramp segment will be adjusted accordingly but the ramp rate will remain unchanged.

• Edits to soak setpoints will result in a step change at the next segment unless the starting value of that segment is changed to the same value as well.


Setpoint Scheduler

Overview

A setpoint schedule produces multiple setpoint outputs on a common time base. A setpoint schedule

contains multiple segments. Each segment contains multiple ramp or soak setpoints, multiple auxiliary soak

outputs, and multiple events. The last segment setpoint must be a soak.

The Setpoint Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory. Any schedule can be edited and

saved in one of the “slots” in the controller’s memory.

A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the Scheduler if a process

variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Guaranteed hold is set on a per-segment basis and

can be set for high deviation, low deviation, high and low deviation, or none.

The schedule may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator

as well as by inputs to the Scheduler function block in the controller configuration. Table 25 lists the

resulting states.

Table 25 SPS inputs and current state

Input Current State

READY HOLD RUN GHOLD STOP DISABLE

RESET READY READY RUN READY READY READY

HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD STOP HOLD

RUN RUN RUN RUN GHOLD STOP RUN

GHOLD READY HOLD GHOLD GHOLD STOP READY

With regard to changing schedule state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution

cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.

Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel, which occur during the same

execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the “last

change wins.”

Setpoint Scheduler Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042


Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Access

Setpoint Scheduler setup is done through the SP Scheduler menu, accessed through the Main Menu. Press

"Enter" for Select Schedule menu. (Schedule 1 or 2). Press "Enter" again to Edit Schedule.

See also

While operating Setpoint Scheduler functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.


Topic See Page

Edit Schedule 67

Edit Segments 68

Edit Setpoints 69

Edit Segment Events 70

Edit Guarantee Hold 71

Save Schedule 72

Edit Guarantee Hold Limits 73

Setpoint Scheduler Edit schedule


Edit schedule

This display lets you edit parameters of the selected schedule. Edits affect only the currently working

schedule, not the schedule in memory, unless you save the schedule.

ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY state to edit the values on this display.

Table 26 Edit schedule details

Feature Description

EDIT SEGMENTS Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 68) where you can edit each segment.

SAVE SCHEDULE Saves changes you make to this display. Schedule is saved in the controller’s schedule memory where it can be loaded and run later.

LABEL Identifies the schedule with text.

TIME UNITS This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the schedule.

JOG SEGMENT Segment to which the schedule will jump to when the JOG discrete input is pulsed.

EDIT GUAR HOLD LIMITS Accesses Edit Guarantee Hold Limits display (page 73) where you can edit guaranteed hold limits for each setpoint.

Setpoint Scheduler Edit segments


Edit segments

This menu lets you specify segment parameters. Edits do not affect schedules in memory unless you save

them.

ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY or STOP state before segments can be edited from this menu.

Table 27 Edit segment details

Feature Description

F1 - NEXT SEG Select this to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG Select this to edit previous segment.

EDITING SCHEDULE # Number of schedule being edited.


TIME Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.

RECYCLE COUNT Number of recycles left

RECYCLE SEGMENT # Recycle segment number

EDIT SETPOINTS Select this to edit the segment setpoints. See Edit setpoints (page 69).

EDIT EVENTS Select this to edit the segment events. See Edit segment events (page 70).

EDIT GUARANTEE HOLD Select this to edit the segment’s guarantee hold settings. See Edit guarantee hold (page 71).

Setpoint Scheduler Edit setpoints


Edit setpoints

This lets you edit the setpoints (8 main and 8 auxiliary) of any segment in the schedule.

Table 28 Edit setpoints details

Feature Description

SPLABEL1 SP1 123456.7 ENGU

.

.

.

SPLABEL8 SP8 123456.7 ENGU

Listed are each setpoint’s label, identifier, value, and engineering units. Select a setpoint value to change and then press Enter to save the change.

AXLABEL1 AX1 123456.7 ENGU

.

.

.

AXLABEL8 AX8 123456.7 ENGU

Press "Page Down" to list the auxiliary setpoints. Listed are each auxiliary setpoint’s label, identifier, value, and engineering units. Select a setpoint value to change and then press Enter to save the change.

Setpoint Scheduler Edit segment events


Edit segment events

This lets you edit the state of up to 16 events for the selected segment. You can configure 1 to 16 segment

events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment events are digital switches that

provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains ON until the end of the segment

at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment.

Table 29 Edit segment events details

Feature Description

EVENT #1 – 16 ON or OFF

TIP

Events can be edited only while schedule is in READY state.

Setpoint Scheduler Edit guarantee hold


Edit guarantee hold

This lets you specify the conditions under which a segment will GHOLD when deviation exceeds the

guarantee hold limits. If any setpoint’s guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire schedule enters GHOLD

state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current value or state) until none

of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.

Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details

Feature Description

SPLABEL SP1

.

.

.

SPLABEL SP8

OFF: Segment will not GHOLD when the PV deviates from SP by its guarantee hold limit.

HIGH: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above SP by more than the SP guarantee hold limit.

LOW: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates below SP by more than the SP guarantee hold limit.

HI/LO: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above or below SP by more than the SP guarantee hold limit.

See also

See Edit guarantee hold limits (page 73).

Setpoint Scheduler Save schedule


Save schedule

This function saves a schedule to the controller’s schedule memory. It is accessed through the main menu

or through the Scheduler Popup menu. The Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory.

You can choose to save a schedule back to controller memory after editing it. See Figure 27.

Table 31 Schedule save details

Feature Description

CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR

The number, name, and description of the schedule currently loaded into the scheduler.

SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER

There are “slots” available in memory for schedules.

ATTENTION: You will overwrite any schedule in the slot. Select the desired slot and press Enter to save the schedule. The schedule is also saved in the Scheduler.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Schedule function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Schedule function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).


Schedules in RAM

Schedule #1

Schedule #2

Schedule #3 . . .

Schedule #3 is saved asSchedule #2 in RAM.

Select MORE COMMANDS… ...then select SAVE.

1

2

Select SAVE TO SCHEDULE # 2

Schedule #3was previouslyloaded intothe Scheduler.

4

3

STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

SP PV

SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU


SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOADMORE COMMANDS


RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

11:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

SP PV

SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOADMORE COMMANDS

STARTHOLDRESETCLEARADVANCEVIEW EVENTSVIEW AUXEDITLOADSAVE

CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER 3

SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER 2

SAVE SCHEDULE

READY READY

Schedules in RAM

Schedule #1

Schedule #2

Schedule #3 . . .


READY # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

11:30

F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

SP PV

SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU


SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOADMORE COMMANDS

5 Scheduler now containsSchedule #2.

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED

Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule

Setpoint Scheduler Save schedule


Edit guarantee hold limits

This lets you specify the amount of deviation needed between a setpoint and its PV for the schedule to

automatically switch to GHOLD state. If any setpoint’s guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire

schedule enters GHOLD state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current

value or state) until none of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.

Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details

Feature Description

SPLABEL1 SP1

.

.

.

SPLABEL8 SP8

For each setpoint, enter the minimum amount of deviation between the Setpoint and PV that will GHOLD the schedule.

See also

See Edit guarantee hold (page 71).

Setpoint Scheduler Setpoint Schedule Operation


Setpoint Schedule Operation

Overview

Access the Setpoint schedule operation display by using the Display Group keys 1

through 5

[8

].

See also

While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.


Topic See Page

Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 1042 75

Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 559 77

Scheduler Popup Menu - Model 559 79

Load Schedule 81

View Scheduler Events 83

View Auxiliary Data 84

Edit Schedule Segments 85

Security

When Security is enabled, (See “Set Security”) the SPS operate display works as follows:




Setpoint Scheduler Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042


Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.

There are selections on the display that let you adjust and view parameters of the schedule.


STATE SCHED SEG RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN 3 2 0SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00

SP PV

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

LOAD

CLEAR

VIEW EVENTS

VIEW AUX

EDIT

SAVE

MYSCHED MY TEST SCHEDULE SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1 MAY 05

11:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042

Feature Description

SPSTAG1 Name of the selected Scheduler block.

MYSCHED Name of the selected schedule.

MY TEST SCHEDULE Description of the selected schedule.

STATE READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All events are OFF.

HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.

RUN: Schedule is executing normally.

GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.

STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.

DISABLE: Schedule is prevented from starting until the Scheduler disable control is ON.

SCHED Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.

SEG Current segment

RECYCLES REMAIN Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered segment so far encountered in the schedule.

Example:

Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore, the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle (repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling, RECYCLES REMAIN will display “10”, during the second recycling it will display “9”, etc.



Feature Description

SEG REMAIN Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTAL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SP Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.

PV Each PV value is shown under this heading.

LOAD Accesses the Load Schedule display (page 77). Schedule must be in READY state.

CLEAR Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY state. Attention: If you clear a schedule you can’t save it.

VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View Schedule Events" (Page 83 )

VIEW AUX Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs. See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 84 )

EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE Accesses the Save Schedule display (page 72). Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

F1

RUN

Push F1 button to start a schedule that is in HOLD or READY state.

F2

HOLD

Push F2 button to put schedule in HOLD.

F3

RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were SAVED. See SAVE on the display.

F4

ADV

Push F4 to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment. Schedules in the last segment will jump to the end of the schedule. Schedules cannot be advanced to the first segment.




Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.


RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00


F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

SP PVSP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559

Feature Description

MY SCHED Name of the selected schedule.

SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location, 1 to 10, of this schedule.

SPSTAG1 Name of the selected schedule block.

STATE READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All events are OFF.

HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.

RUN: Schedule is executing normally.

GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.

STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.

SEG # Current segment


Example:


SEG REM Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SP Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.

PV Each PV value is shown under this heading.



Feature Description

LOAD Accesses the Load Schedule display (Page 81). Schedule must be in READY state.

MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate menu (Page 79)

F1

RUN


F2

HOLD


F3

RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were SAVED. See SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 30).

F4

ADV

Push F4 to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment. Schedules in the last segment will jump to the end of the schedule. Schedules cannot be advanced to the first segment.




Scheduler popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the schedule. Some

actions require the schedule to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 35.


RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SPSTAG1 SCHED3 MYSCHED 11:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

SP PVSP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

CLEAR

VIEW EVENTS

VIEW AUX

EDITSAVE

Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559

Feature Description

CLEAR Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY state. Do not clear a schedule if you need to save it first.

VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View Schedule Events" (Page 83)

VIEW AUX Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs. See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 84 )

EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE Accesses the Save Schedule display (Figure 27). Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

F1

RUN


F2

HOLD


F3

RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were SAVED. See SAVE on the display.

F4

ADV

Push F4 button to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment.

When the schedule is already in the last segment, the advance request is ignored.

Schedules cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must either READY or HOLD.



In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the schedule is in that state. NA

means the action is not available in that state.

Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state

Schedule state

Action READY RUN HOLD GHOLD STOP DISABLE

CLEAR X NA NA NA NA NA

EDIT X NA X NA X NA

SAVE X NA X NA X NA

Setpoint Scheduler Load schedule


Load schedule

This menu lets you load a schedule from memory into a setpoint scheduler where it can be run or edited.

Table 37 Schedule load details

Feature Description

CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR

Number, name, description of schedule being run by the scheduler.

LOAD FROM SCHEDULE NUMBER Number of schedule to be loaded from memory. Loading schedule number 0 (zero) will clear the working schedule.

LOAD FROM SCHEDULE LIST Schedule number, when selected from a list of schedules, will be loaded from memory.

SEGMENT NUMBER After loading, the schedule will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a recycle loop, the schedule cycles through the recycled segments according to the number of recycles.


Schedules in RAM.

SCHEDULE #1

SCHEDULE #2

SCHEDULE #3

. . .

Schedulercontains SCHEDULE #1

1

2

3

4

Select LOAD FROM

SCHEDULE NUMBERandSEGMENT NUMBER.

Schedule #3 is loaded fromRAM to Schedule #1.Schedule will start at Segment

#5 during its first run.Subsequent runs always startat Segment #1.

Select LOAD


RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00


F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

SP PVSP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1 LABEL678LOAD FROM SCHED NUM 3SEGMENT NUMBER 5

LOAD SCHEDULE


RUN # 5 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00


F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV


LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

READY

READY

Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number

Setpoint Scheduler Load schedule


Schedules in RAM.

Scheduler

contains SCHEDULE #1

1

2

34

Select LOAD FROM

SCHEDULE LISTand

SEGMENT NUMBER.

Schedule #3 is loaded from

RAM to Scheduler.Schedule will start at Segment

#5 during its first run.

Subsequent runs always startat Segment #1.

Select LOAD


RUN # 2 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00


F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3

RESET

F4ADV

SP PVSP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUSP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU

LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1 LABEL678LOAD FROM SCHED NUMBER 3LOAD FROM SCHED LIST

SEGMENT NUMBER 5

LOAD SCHEDULE


RUN # 5 100

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00


F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV


LOAD

MORE COMMANDS

READY

READY

SCHEDULES IN MEMORY

SPSTAG01

SCHEDULE 1 LABEL DESCRIPTOR





Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list

Setpoint Scheduler View schedule events


View schedule events

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.


STATE SCHED SEGMENT RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN 3 2 0

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00

EV1 SPS1EV1 OFF EV9 SPS1EV1 ON




EV5 SPS1EV5 OFF EV13 SPS1EV1 ONEV6 SPS1EV6 OFF EV14 SPS1EV1 ON

EV7 SPS1EV7 OFF EV15 SPS1EV1 ONEV8 SPS1EV8 OFF EV16 SPS1EV1 ON

SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1 MAY 05

11:30MYSCHED MY TEST SCHEDULE

Figure 33 View schedule events

Table 38 View schedule events details

Feature Description

SPSTAG1 Name of selected schedule block

SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.


MY TEST SCHEDULE Description of selected schedule.


SEG # Current segment.


Example


SEG REM Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

EV# EVENTxxx State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.


Setpoint Scheduler View auxiliary data


View auxiliary data

This display lets you see details on the schedule auxiliary setpoints and PVs.



RUN 3 2 0

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00

SP PV

AUX1 SPS1AUX1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX2 SPS1AUX2 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX3 SPS1AUX3 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX4 SPS1AUX4 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX5 SPS1AUX5 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX6 SPS1AUX6 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX7 SPS1AUX7 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

AUX8 SPS1AUX8 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1 MAY 05

11:30MYSCHED MY TEST SCHEDULE

Figure 34 View auxiliary data

Table 39 View auxiliary data details

Feature Description

SPSTAG1 Name of the selected scheduler block.



SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.

SEG # Current segment.


Example


SEG REMAIN Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTAL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

AUX# AXLABEL Labels of the 8 auxiliary setpoints

SP Under the SP heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary setpoints.

PV Under the PV heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary PVs.


Setpoint Scheduler Edit segments


Edit segments

This menu lets you edit the schedule segments of the working schedule. Edits do not affect schedules in

memory unless you save them.

ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.

EDITING SCHEDULE # 3LABEL

SEGMENT # 10TIME UNIT HOURS

TIME 0.000EDIT SETPOINTS

SPS SCHEDULE EDIT SEGMENT

F1 - NEXT SEG F2 - PREV SEG

Figure 35 Edit segments

Table 40 Edit segments details

Feature Description

F1 - NEXT SEG Select this to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG Select this to edit previous segment.

EDITING SCHEDULE # LABEL Number and label of schedule being edited.


TIME UNITS Time units of the schedule. Minutes or Hours.

TIME Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.

EDIT SETPOINTS Lets you edit the segment setpoints.


TIP

• Edits are allowed to any segment of the schedule, including the current segment.

• If edit is to current segment:

− Changes to the setpoint will result in a step change.

− Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is less than or equal to 0, the schedule will advance to the next segment.

• If the starting value of the following segment is changed (F1-NEXT SEG), then the ramp rate in the current segment will be adjusted accordingly but the time remaining will remain unchanged.


Sequencers

Overview

The Sequencer function block controls the states of up to 16 digital outputs and one analog output. Each

combination of output states represents a "State” of the Sequencer block, such as PURGE, FILL, HEAT, or

COOL. Each function block supports up to 50 States. The user sets up these states during the configuration

of the function block.

The user-configurable program that runs within the Sequencer function block is called a “Sequence.” Each

Sequence contains up to 64 “Steps”; each Step activates one of the 50 States supported by the function

block. Note that the same State can be used by more than one Step within a Sequence.

Each Step within a Sequence may be configured to advance to any other Step based on time (hours or

minutes), digital event (2 per Step), or manual advance. A separate jog function is also provided.

The controller maintains a pool of 20 user-configurable Sequences in its memory. The Sequences in the

pool can be assigned to run within any of the Sequencer function blocks. Once it has been loaded into a

Sequencer function block, a Sequence can be modified through the menus provided on this Operator

Interface. A modified Sequence can also be saved back to the pool for later recall, if desired.

Sequencers Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042


Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Overview

The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit the Sequences that are currently loaded into one of the

available Sequencer function blocks. After editing the Sequence you can save it back to the pool of

Sequences for later recall, if desired. Note that you can only edit the Sequence from this menu if the

Sequencer function block is in the READY or STOP mode.

The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit sequences in controller memory. Operating sequences are not

affected. For viewing and editing live sequences, see Sequencer Operation on page 96.

Access

Main Menu: Sequencers.

See also

While operating Sequencers, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.


Topic See Page

Edit Sequence 89

Edit Steps 90

Edit Step Details 91

View Step Details 92

View Sequence Outputs 93

Select State 94

Save Sequence 95



Edit Sequence

Table 41 Edit Sequence

Feature Description

EDIT STEPS Displays Edit Steps screen. See page 90.

SAVE SEQUENCE Saves a sequence to controller memory. Press Enter. "Save Sequencer" screen lets you "Save to Sequence Number". See Page 95

SEQUENCE NAME Allows edits to sequence name.

SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION

Allows edits to sequence description.

TIME UNITS Select hours or minutes.

JOG TO STEP Select a step number. When the sequencer’s JOG input is triggered, the sequencer will jump to the start of this step then continue.



Edit Steps


SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR MAY0611:30

PAGE 1 OF 4 CURRENT STEP - 11

OUTPUTS NEXT STEP

STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TIMER EV1 EV2 ADV

1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

EDIT STEP DETAILS

VIEW STEP DETAILS

Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example)

Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps

Feature Description

STEP Step number

STATE Name of state

OUTPUTS 1 - 16 (Model 1042 only)

Output states: 1 or 0.

TIMER When the timer duration expires, the sequence will jump to this step.

EV1 When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.


ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

EDIT STEP DETAILS Lets you edit step details. See page 91.

VIEW STEP DETAILS Displays detailed popup window. See page 92.




Edit Step Details

Edits are allowed only when the Sequencer function block is in the Ready or Stop mode.

If you specify a “next step” of zero, the Sequence will STOP when its “next step” trigger is received. For

example, if Step 1 has a Timer Duration of one minute and a “Timer Next Step” of zero, the Sequence will

stay in Step 1 for one minute and then STOP.

If you specify a Timer Duration value of zero, the Sequence will remain at that Step until Event 1 or Event

2 occurs, or an Advance input or command is received.

Table 43 Edit Step Details

Feature Description

F1 – NEXT STEP Displays next step.

F2 – PREV STEP Displays previous step.

F3 – GO TO STEP Displays chosen step.

SEQUENCE NUMBER Sequence number.

SEQUENCE NAME Sequence name.


Sequence description.

TIME UNITS Hours or Minutes

SELECT STATE Displays the Select State popup window. See page 94. Available only from main menu.

TIMER DURATION Length of the step in time units.

AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output.

TIMER NEXT STEP When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.

EVENT 1 NEXT STEP

When Event 1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

EVENT 2 NEXT STEP

When Event 2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

ADVANCE NEXT STEP

When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.




View Step Details

Press Esc to remove the View Step Details popup window.


SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR MAY06

11:30PAGE 1 OF 4 CURRENT STEP - 11

OUTPUTS

STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 STATE001LABL 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VIEW STEP DETAILS

EDIT STEP DETAILS

STEP 1STATE

STATE001LABL

TIMER DURATION

0000:01:06

AUX OUTPUT

100.0

NEXT STEP

TIMER - 2

EV 1 - 3

EV 2 - 4

ADV - 2

EVENT 1

TAGNAME1

EVENT 2

TAGNAME2

PRESS ENTER

FOR OUTPUTS

F1 - NEXT STEP

F2 - PREV STEP

F3 - GO TO STEP

Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example)

Feature Description

STEP Step number

STATE State name

TIMER DURATION Duration of state (hours or minutes)


NEXT STEP TIMER When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP EVENT1 When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP EVENT2 When Event2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

PRESS ENTER FOR OUTPUTS

Displays a popup window for the outputs. See page 93.

F1 – NEXT STEP Press F1 to view the next step’s details.

F2 – PREV STEP Press F2 to view the previous step’s details.

F3 – GO TO STEP Press F3 to select any step and view its details.




View Sequence Outputs

Press Esc to remove the Output popup window.




OUTPUTS

STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 STATE001LABL 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VIEW STEP DETAILS

EDIT STEP DETAILS

STEP 1STATE

STATE001LABL

OUTPUTS1 OUTLBL01 ON

2 OUTLBL02 OFF

3 OUTLBL03 OFF

4 OUTLBL04 OFF

5 OUTLBL05 OFF

6 OUTLBL06 OFF

7 OUTLBL07 OFF

8 OUTLBL08 OFF

9 OUTLBL09 OFF

10 OUTLBL10 OFF

11 OUTLBL11 OFF

12 OUTLBL12 OFF

13 OUTLBL13 OFF

14 OUTLBL14 OFF

15 OUTLBL15 OFF

16 OUTLBL16 OFF

ENTER:DETAILS

F1 - NEXT STEP

F2 - PREV STEP

F3 - GO TO STEP

Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example)

Feature Description

STEP Step number

STATE State name

OUTPUTS 1 - 16 The configured state of the function block’s 16 outputs.

ENTER: DETAILS Press Enter to return to the View Details popup screen. See page 92.

F1 – NEXT STEP Press F1 to view the next step’s details..

F2 – PREV STEP Press F2 to view the previous step’s details.

F3 – GO TO STEP Press F3 to select any step and view its details.




Select State

Lets you select which state to assign to the step.

A unique State, “State 0”, can be used to indicate the last step in a Sequence. The Sequencer function

block will go to Stop mode when it encounters any Step who’s State is State 0. State 0 is the first item

shown on Page 1 of the Select State popup windows.


EDIT STEP 1

F1 - NEXT STEP

F2 - PREV STEPF3 - GO TO STEP

SEQUENCE NUMBER 1

SEQUENCE NAME SEQNCABCSEQUENCE DESCRIPTION MAKEPRODUCTXYZ

TIME UNITS MINUTES

SELECT STATE STATE001LABL

TIMER DURATION 1.1AUX OUTPUT 100.0

TIMER NEXT STEP 2EVENT 1 NEXT STEP 3

EVENT 2 NEXT STEP 4ADVANCE NEXT STEP 2

SELECT STATE

PAGE 1 OF 4

STATE 1 4 8 12 16 EVENT 1 EVENT 2

- 1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --

- 2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME1 TAGNAME2


- 4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME5 --

- 5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --


- 7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --

- 8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --

- 9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --

- 10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --

Table 46 Select State

Feature Description

STATE Lists all possible states you can assign to the step. Page up and down to see all choices. Move cursor up or down to the desired state then press Enter to select.

1 4 8 12 16 (Model 1042)

1 5 9 16 (Model 559)

Headings indicating the digital outputs of the block.

EVENT 1 (Model 1042 only) Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a specified step.

EVENT 2 (Model 1042 only) Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a specified step.


Sequencers Save Sequence


Save Sequence

This function saves a sequence to the controller’s sequencer memory. It is accessed through the main menu

or through the Sequencer Popup menu. The Sequencer can run any of the sequences in controller memory.

You can choose to save a sequence back to controller memory after editing it.

Table 47 Sequence save details

Feature Description

CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR

The number, name, and description of the sequence currently loaded into the sequencer.

SAVE TO SEQUENCE NUMBER

There are “slots” available in memory for sequences.

ATTENTION: You will overwrite any sequence in the slot. Select the desired slot and press Enter to save the sequence. The sequence is also saved in the sequencer.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Sequence function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Sequence function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).


Sequencers Sequencer Operation


Sequencer Operation

Overview

The Sequencer operation display is accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 5

, [8

].

See also

While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.


Topic See Page

Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 97

Sequencer Operation - Model 559 98

Sequencer Popup Menu - Model 559 99

Load Sequencer 100

View/Edit Sequence 101

Edit Steps/Edit Step Details 102

Security

When Security is enabled, (See “Set Security”) the Sequencer operate display works as follows:




Sequencers Sequencer Operation - Model 1042


Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

Access

Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 5 [8

].

Sequencer Operation Display

STATE HEATING

SEQUENCER

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60 STATE 4

12:30

STEP 1 MODE RUN

STEP STEP SEQUENCE

ELAPSED TIME TIME REMAINING ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0

AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF

SEQUENCE 20 COGS

F1RUN

F3RESET

F2HOLD

F4ADV

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCELOAD SEQUENCEEDIT STEPSSAVE SEQUENCECLEAR SEQUENCE

SEQBLOK1

SEQ Description

Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042

Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

Feature Description

SEQBLOK1 Name of the selected Sequencer block.

COQS Name of the selected sequence.

SEQ Description Description of the selected sequence.

STATE Name of the currently active State.

STEP n Current step number.

MODE Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.

STEP ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.

STEP TIME REMAINING Time remaining in the current Step.

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.

AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.

F1 RUN Runs the sequence.

F2 HOLD Holds the sequence.

F3 RESET Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.

F4 ADV Advances to the indicated step.

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 90.

LOAD SEQUENCE Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 100.

EDIT STEPS Lets you edit step details. See page 91.

SAVE SEQUENCE Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 95.

CLEAR SEQUENCE Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another sequence you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.




Sequencer Operation - Model 559

Access

Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 5 [8

].

Sequencer Operation Display

STATE HEATING

SEQUENCER


12:30

AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF

SEQUENCE 20 COGSF1

RUN

F3RESET

F2HOLD

F4ADV

STEP 1 MODE READYSTEP ELAPSED TIME

STEP TIME REMAINING

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0

0000:00:00.0

0000:00:00.0

LOAD SEQUENCEMORE COMMANDS

SEQ Description

SEQBLOK1

Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559

Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559

Feature Description

STATE Name of the currently active State.

STEP n Current step number.

MODE Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.

STEP ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.

STEP TIME REMAINING Time remaining in the current Step.

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.

AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.

F1 RUN Runs the sequence.

F2 HOLD Holds the sequence.

F3 RESET Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.

F4 ADV Advances to the indicated step.

LOAD SEQUENCE Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 100

MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate Menu. See page 99




Sequencer popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the sequencer. Some

actions require the sequencer to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 50

STATE HEATING

SEQUENCER


12:30

AUX OUTPUT - 124.6

SEQUENCE 20 COGSF1

RUN

F3

RESET

F2

HOLD

F4

ADV

STEP 1 MODE READYSTEP ELAPSED TIME

STEP TIME REMAINING

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0

0000:00:00.0

0000:00:00.0

LOAD SEQUENCE

MORE COMMANDS

CLEAR

EDIT STEPS

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE

SAVE

SEQBLOK1

SEQ Description

Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559

Feature Description

CLEAR Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another sequence you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.

EDIT STEPS Lets you edit step details. See page 102

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 100

SAVE Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 95

Sequencers Load Sequencer


Load Sequencer

This menu lets you load a sequence from a sequence number or sequence list to a sequencer where it can be

run or edited.

Table 51 Schedule load details

Feature Description

CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR

Number, name, description of sequence being run by the sequencer.

LOAD FROM SEQUENCE NUMBER Number of sequence to be loaded from memory. Loading sequence number 0 (zero) will clear the working sequence.

LOAD FROM SEQUENCE LIST Sequence number, when selected from a list of sequences, will be loaded from memory.

STEP NUMBER After loading, the sequence will start at this step. Subsequent runs will start at step #1. If the step number is within a recycle loop, the sequencer cycles through the recycled steps according to the number of recycles.


Sequencers View/Edit Sequence


View/Edit Sequence




OUTPUTS NEXT STEP

STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TIMER EV1 EV2 ADV

1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2 14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2

EDIT STEP DETAILSVIEW STEP DETAILS

Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps

Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps

Feature Description

STEP Step number

STATE Name of state

OUTPUTS 1 - 16 Output states: 1 or 0.

TIMER When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.



ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

EDIT STEP DETAILS Lets you edit step details. See page 102.

VIEW STEP DETAILS Displays detailed popup window. See page 92.


Sequencers Edit Steps/Edit Step Details


Edit Steps/Edit Step Details

This menu can be accessed directly from the Sequencer Operation display or from the View/Edit Sequence

display.

The items on this menu cannot be edited while the function block is in the Run mode.

Table 53 Edit Step Details

Feature Description

F1 – NEXT STEP Displays next step.

F2 – PREV STEP Displays previous step.

F3 – GO TO STEP Displays chosen step.

SEQUENCE NUMBER Sequence number.

SEQUENCE NAME Sequence name.


Sequence description.

TIME UNITS Hours or Minutes

TIMER DURATION Length of the step in time units.



ATTENTION

F3 Reset erases all edits unless you save them first.


Loops

Overview

The two main tasks associated with loops are setup and operation. Setup is done through the Loop menu

and is described in Loop Setup. Operation is done through various loop displays accessed through the

Display Group keys 1

through 5 [ 8 ] and is described in Loop Operation.

Loop modes

All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in

Table 54.

Table 54 Loop modes

Loop mode Meaning

AUTO RSP Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.

MAN RSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.

IMAN RSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.

Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary Cascade’s PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.

LO RSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loop’s Output Tracking value. Remote Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override Status Is ON.

AUTO LSP Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.

MAN LSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.

IMAN LSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.

Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary Cascade’s PV. Local Setpoint is selected.

LO LSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loop’s Output Tracking value. Local Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.

PID Primary

BCI

PID Secondary

BCO

RSP

When PID Secondary is in Manual

or when Local Setpoint is selected,

PID Primary mode is IMAN. IMAN

causes the PID Primary output to

track the PID Secondary PV.

Figure 41 IMAN loop mode

Loops What’s in this section



Loop Function See page

Common Loop Tasks 106

Loop Setup 106

Loop trend 107

Loop Accutune III 108

Tuning Status 110

Loop Accutune 112

Loop tune constants 113

Loop control setup 114

Carbon parameters 115

Loop alarm setpoints 116

Loop limits 117

Loop Operation Displays 119

Loop summary 120

Loop control 121

Multiloop faceplate 124

1 loop numeric 125

Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen 126

Loop Tune Constants display 127

A/M bias 128

Loops Common Loop Tasks


Common Loop Tasks

You can do these tasks from any live loop display.

Table 55 Common loop tasks

Task How to do it

To manually change a control loop’s output or setpoint value

Model 1042 only:

Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9 to manually enter a

value. Press Enter to accept the value, press

Escape ESC

to leave it unchanged.

Model 559/1042:

Press Increment or Decrement to manually select a value. Changes to a value are done “live” and do not require pressing Enter, you cannot cancel the

changes by pressing Escape ESC

.

To adjust a loop’s setpoint, output, or switch between Local and Remote setpoints

1. Access a display that has a cursor around the loop tag

at the top of the display. If multiple loops, press Tab to move cursor to the desired loop tag.

2. Press Detail to move between the loop tag, SP value, and Output value (if in Manual).

3. Adjust values according to previous task.

4. With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter to jump to that loop’s control screen:

TYPE PID

PV 1234567

OUTPUT 1234567

LOCAL SP 1234567

REMOTE SP 1234567

SWITCH SP

LOOP CONTROL

LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU

See Loop control (page 121).

To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and MANUAL Press Auto/Manual

Loops Loop Setup


Loop Setup

Access

Main menu.

Select loop

Select a loop. The loop menu for that loop will appear.

See also

While performing Loop menu functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message

descriptions.

Loop menu

Items on the Loop menu are visible according to the loop type.

Table 56 Loop menu visibility

Loop type

Menu item PID ON/OFF 3 POS CARBON A/M BIAS

LOOP TREND X X X

ACCUTUNEIII X X

ACCUTUNE X

TUNE CONSTANTS X X X

CONTROL SETUP X X X X X

CARBON PARAMETERS X

ALARM SETPOINTS X X X X X

LIMITS X X X X X

HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING X X

X indicates item is visible

Select one of the following functions from the Select Loop Menu.

Loop Function See page

Loop Trend 107

AccutuneIII 108

Accutune 112

Tune Constants 113

Control Setup 114

Carbon Parameters 115

Alarm Setpoints 116

Limits 117

High Output Limiting 118

Loops Loop Setup


Loop trend

The Loop Trend shows a graphical and textual overview of a selected loop.

LOOPTAG1 TUNE MAY06

11:30 AUTO RSP ENGU

PV 2205.0OUT 83.5

SP 2000.0DEV 205.0

2500.0

1500.0

07:35 07:55 08:15

Figure 42 Single loop trend

Table 57 Details of single loop trend

Feature Description

Loop mode See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press Auto/Manual.

Loop Tag Press Detail to move cursor to this, then press Enter to display the Loop Tune Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 113). You can switch between these two displays; the trend line will be buffered.

Setpoint value of the loop.

PV bar graph on right side

Current value of PV

PV value at lower left Current value of PV

PV trend Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed by switching to Loop Tune Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 113).

OUT Loop output. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and Decrement to change value. Loop must be in MAN.

SP Setpoint value. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and Decrement to change value.

DEV PV’s deviation from setpoint.

TUNE When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop Accutune III (page 108) or Loop Accutune (page 112).


TIP

This display is not selectable from the Loop Menu for ON/OFF or A/M BIAS loop type.

Loops Loop Setup


Loop Accutune III

This display lets you set up and start the loop Accutune III tuning function. When initiated, the controller

will start controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants, and

begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters.

Table 58 Details of Loop Accutune III (listed in order of appearance)

Feature Description

Loop mode See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press the Auto/Manual button.

LSP/RSP See Table 54 for details. This item indicates the source of this loop’s Setpoint, Local or Remote.

VIEW TUNING STATUS

Select this item to view the status of the tuning process on the TUNING STATUS display (Table 59 below).

FUZZY Select ON to activate Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression to minimize overshoot after a setpoint change or a process disturbance.

Select OFF to disable Fuzzy Logic.

The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as required by the application to work with “TUNE” On-Demand tuning.

PV ADAPTIVE TUNING

Tuning method that continuously learns the process as PV deviations are observed and adapts the tuning parameters to the process response.

DISABLE - Disables PV Adaptive tune.

ENABLE - This method adapts a tuned process to changing system characteristics over time, when the PV deviates from the Setpoint by a certain amount for any reason. See note 3.

ACCUTUNE III TYPE

DISABLE - Disables ACCUTUNE III.

CYCLE TUNING - Tuning parameter values are derived from the process response to the resultant action of causing the PV to oscillate about the Setpoint value. See note 1.

SP TUNING – Setpoint Tuning based on the process response to a Setpoint change. See note 2.

TUNING CRITERIA

NORMAL - Very conservative tuning designed to calculate critically damped tuning parameter values that produce no overshoot.

FAST - More aggressive tuning than Normal. Designed to calculate under damped parameter values providing faster control to the setpoint but may have some overshoot.

Loops Loop Setup


Feature Description

DUPLEX TUNING

Selection of three tuning actions when performing a Cycle Tuning procedure on a Duplex control loop.

DISABLE - Duplex type tuning is disabled and simplex type tuning is used instead. The resultant is blended tuning which is derived from the process response to cycling the output between the low and the high output limits. The calculated tuning parameter values are stored for each side.

MANUAL - Tuning must be initiated manually for each side. The current LSP or RSP value is used as the target SP for the desired heat or cool side tuning. For the heat side, the output cycles between 50 percent and the high output limit and for the cool side the output cycles between 50 percent and the low output limit. Tuning values are calculated and stored only for the side tuned.

AUTOMATIC - Heat and Cool tuning are sequentially performed automatically. During the operation of this tuning the target SP used is the mid point between the high output limit and 50 percent for the heat side and the low output limit and 50 percent for the cool side. During tuning for each side the cycling of the output results in the PV oscillating around the target SP value. From the data gathered during the oscillations, tuning values are calculated and stored for each side. After tuning on both sides is completed, the process SP is returned to the value of the last SP used prior to the initiation of the tuning procedure.

SP STEP CHANGE

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. Select a value between 5 and 15%. This defines the value of the initial Setpoint step change that is used as the target Setpoint value for process identification.

SP TUNE STEP DIRECTION

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. The selection of UP or DOWN results in the Setpoint change value added to or subtracted from the present Setpoint value.

PROCESS GAIN

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. Gain identification value for the process. Select a value between 0.10 and 10.0. Normal value is 1. This value is used to estimate the size of the initial output step for a Setpoint Tune.

(SWITCH) TUNE SET

TSET1 uses Gain #1, Rate #1, and Reset #1.


START TUNE Select this to begin the Accutune III process.


TIP

This display is selectable only from the Loop Menu for PID and CARBON loop type.

Note 1: CYCLE TUNING - This tuning method uses the measured ultimate gain and period to produce

tuning parameter values. Cycle tuning does not distinguish between process lags and always results in gain

based on PV amplitude and calculates values of Reset and Rate based on time of the SP crossings (The

Reset value is always 4x the Rate value.) This method does not require a stable process initially and the

process may be moving.

Note 2: SETPOINT TUNING - When initiated the control loop is put into an initial temporary manual

state until the process characteristics are identified. This period may last up to a minute. During this time

the Tune status shows Not Ready, and then an initial output step is made using the preconfigured size and

direction parameters along with the preset output value. The resultant process action is used to determine

the tuning parameters and once the process identification has completed, the loop is returned to automatic

control.

Note 3: PV ADAPTIVE TUNING - This method adapts a tuned process to changing system

characteristics over time. It operates by observing a previously tuned process for changes in the system

Loops Loop Setup


such as changes in deadtime or other process characteristics that can make a tuned process become

unstable, unresponsive or over responsive. When the PV deviates from the SP by a certain amount for any

reason, the adaptive tuning algorithm becomes active and begins to observe the resulting PV action. If the

process becomes unstable and oscillates, PV Adaptive Tuning eventually brings the process into control by

retuning parameter values (as needed) using a systematic approach defined by an expert based method of

tuning rules. Should the process not oscillate but be observed as too fast or sluggish, a different expert rules

set is applied to result in the slowing down or speeding up of the process by adjusting certain tuning

parameter values. This method continuously learns the process as PV deviations are observed and adapts

the tuning parameters to the process response.

Tuning Status

This display shows you the current status of the Accutune III loop tuning process. It also shows you the

current values of other important loop values (PV, Setpoint, etc.).

Please note that all of the information shown on this display is read-only.

Table 59 Details of the Tuning Status display

Feature Description

Loop mode The current mode of this loop, AUTO or MANUAL.

LSP/RSP The source of this loop’s Setpoint, Local or Remote

TUNE STATUS

Inactive – The Accutune III tuning process is not active.

Tuning – The Accutune III tuning progress is active.

ACTIVE TUNE SET

Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

PV Value of Process Variable

SETPOINT Value of setpoint

OUTPUT Output of loop

OVERRIDE ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

PV ADAPTIVE TUNING

DISABLE - PV Adaptive Tuning is Disabled.

ENABLE – PV Adaptive Tuning is Enabled.

ACCUTUNE MODE

Status indication of present selection for ACCUTUNE III TYPE (DISABLED, CYCLE TUNING, or SP TUNING).

Loops Loop Setup


Feature Description

ACCUTUNE STATUS

ACCUTUNE III Status and Error prompts:

NOT READY - This is shown:

- When the control mode is Manual.

- For a Setpoint Tune when the difference between the PV and Setpoint is greater than 3%.

- When a Setpoint Tune is initiated and the PV is determined, by the adaptive logic to not have enough “historical data”, or the PV is moving too much to begin a Setpoint Tune. Either of these conditions will result in the Not Ready status and the Setpoint Tune algorithm will then wait until the PV is determined to be ready for the Setpoint Tune to begin.

READY - Indicates that the PV is at lineout in regards to the Setpoint. Lineout occurs when the PV is within .2% of the Setpoint value.

TUNE RUNNING - Accutune lll process still active.

ID FAILURE - SP Tune failed to properly identify the process. This usually occurs when SP Tune is initiated with a process that is moving. Retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is stable and not moving in any direction.

SP ERROR - For Cycle Tuning this occurs for Duplex, Manual Tuning when the SP value is not in the proper range. For cool side tuning the SP must be less than 48% and for heat side tuning the SP must be greater then 52% of the PV range. For SP Tune this error condition occurs if the deviation between the PV and SP is greater than 3% of the PV range when SP Tune is initiated. Retry the SP Tune after adjusting the deviation to be less than 3%.

GAIN ERROR - This error condition occurs when the process gain value (Kpg) is not within the range of 0.10 to 10. Adjust this value to 1.00 and retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is stable and not moving in any direction.

OUTPUT ERROR - For SP Tune this occurs when the initial output is not within the configured output limits. Check the SP step direction and size to make sure they are correct or modify the SP to use a value closer to the PV middle range.

PV ADT RUNNING - PV tuning is active monitoring the process.

ABORT - Current Accutune III process was aborted. An active Accutune III process will be aborted is if the loop is placed in the Manual mode.


Loops Loop Setup


Loop Accutune

This display lets you set up and start the loop tuning function. When initiated, the controller will start

controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants, and begins PID

control with the correct tuning parameters.

Table 60 Details of loop Accutune (not listed in order of appearance)

Feature Description


STATUS Inactive, Tuning (is in progress)


OUTPUT Output of loop

OVERRIDE ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

SETPOINT Value of setpoint

ACTIVE TUNE SET

Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

FUZZY Select ON to activate Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression to minimize overshoot after a setpoint change or a process disturbance.

Select OFF to disable Fuzzy Logic.

The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as required by the application to work with “TUNE” On-Demand tuning.

ACCUTUNE Select Enable to display the tuning menu items below. Select Disable to hide them from view.

(SWITCH) TUNE SET



START TUNE Select this to begin the Accutuning process.


TIP

This display is selectable only from the Loop Menu for 3 POS STEP loop type.

Loops Loop Setup


Loop tune constants

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.

Table 61 Details of loop tune constants

Feature Description

ACTIVE TUNE SET Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

SWITCH TUNE SET Lets you select the active tune set (TSET1 or TSET2). Determines which set of Gain/PB, Rate, and Reset parameters are used by the loop.

GAIN #1 OR #2 * Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change (%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band.

PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) # 1 OR #2 *

PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.

RATE #1 OR #2 Rate affects the controller’s output whenever the deviation is changing; and affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.

RESET #1 OR #2 Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controller’s output according to the size of the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).

FEEDFORWARD GAIN** Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).

MANUAL RESET** Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.

SET TIMEBASE Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 15, 30 minutes (default), 1, 2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 107) for details.


*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer. **Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS Step, or CARBON.

TIP

• You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend (page 107). Pressing Escape will return you to the Loop Trend, preserving the buffered trend data.

• If you access this screen from the Loop menu, the Loop Trend’s buffered data is not preserved.

Loops Loop Setup


Loop control setup

The Loop Control Setup Display shows parameters of the selected loop.

Table 62 Details of loop control setup

Feature Description


TYPE PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M BIAS

DIRECT/REVERSE Shows control action.

DIRECT: PID action causes output to increase as PV increases. REVERSE: PID action causes output to decrease as PV increases.

PV Value of process variable.

OUTPUT Loop’s output in %.

OVERRIDE ON Appears when high output limit override is active.

LOCAL SP* Value of Local Setpoint.

REMOTE SP* Value of Remote Setpoint. This value is changeable only if it is configured as a second Local Setpoint (LSP2). It is read-only if it is connected to a function block within the configuration.

SWITCH SP* Select this to switch between LSP and RSP.

FAILSAFE Loop’s output during a failure. -5% to +105%.

RATIO GAIN ** Gain value for a ratio loop. -20 to +20.

RATIO BIAS ** Local bias value in engineering units. -99999 to +99999. Enterable only if it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured for remote bias.

MOTOR DEADBAND % *** Value of adjustable deadband in %.

MOTOR TRAVERSE TIME (SEC) *** Motor travel time in seconds.

HYSTERESIS**** Loop alarm’s hysteresis. 0 to 10% of PV range.

Bold items are read-only. * Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias. ** Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS, or CARBON and Bias/Gain is configured. *** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS. **** Visible only if Loop Type is ON/OFF.

TIP

• The controller will ignore entry of Local Setpoint if tracking is on and if the loop is in Manual mode.

• Ratio Bias is enterable only if it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured for remote bias.

Loops Loop Setup


Carbon parameters

This display lets you adjust various carbon loop factors.

Table 63 Details of carbon loop

Feature Description


FURNACE FACTOR Lets you adjust the % Carbon as measured by the controller to agree with the results of actual shim stock tests. This adjustment may be needed to correct for specific furnace characteristics such as atmosphere differences, probe location, and furnace leaks.

ANTI-SOOTING Lets you adjust the anti-sooting factor, which limits the %C working setpoint of the downstream control block to a value which will not permit sooting to occur in the furnace. When anti-sooting is ON, then the anti-sooting factor is calculated as a linear translation of probe temperature to %C clamped at 0.75% and 2.0%. When anti-sooting is OFF, then the factor is fixed at 2.0% for all temperatures.

% HYDROGEN Lets you adjust % HYDROGEN, one of the factors in the dewpoint calculation. The dewpoint calculation is a function of the mV input (IN) from the oxygen probe, temperature of the probe, and %H. The equations used are probe-type dependent and are supplied by the manufacturer.

% CO Lets you adjust % Carbon measurement to compensate for variations in the amount of CO in the carrier gas. This value is changeable only if it is configured as a number. It is read-only if it is connected to a function block within the configuration.

TIP

• Carbon Parameters are visible only for Carbon loop types.

Loops Loop Setup


Loop alarm setpoints

This display shows the loop’s setpoints and alarm types. A loop can have two alarms; and each loop alarm

can have two setpoints and types.

Table 64 Details of loop alarm setpoints

Feature Description


ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 The value at which the alarm will activate.

ALARM 1 TYPE 1 No Alarm

PV High - Alarm when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint

PV Low - Alarm when PV is less than the alarm setpoint

Dev High - Alarm when PV - SP is greater than the alarm setpoint.

Dev Low - Alarm when SP - PV is greater than the alarm setpoint.

SP High - Alarm when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint

SP Low - Alarm when SP is less than the alarm setpoint

Out High - Alarm when output is greater than the alarm setpoint

Out Low - Alarm when output is less than the alarm setpoint

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1

ALARM 1 TYPE 2 same as Alarm 1 Type 1





ALARM HYSTERESIS Affects the point at which an alarm clears. For Out High and Out Low alarms, hysteresis is % of the loop’s output span. For all other alarm types, it is % of PV span.

PV High - Alarm clears when PV is less than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

PV Low - Alarm clears when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

SP High - Alarm clears when SP is less than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

SP Low - Alarm clears when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

Out High - Alarm clears when output is less than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

Out Low - Alarm clears when output is greater than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

Dev High - Alarm clears when PV - SP is less than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

Dev Low - Alarm clears when SP - PV is less than the alarm setpoint by the amount of hysteresis.

TIP

These Loop Alarm parameters are used to set the conditions under which loop alarms occur; they do not generate the alarm. To generate the alarm, loop alarms must be configured in an Alarm Group. If a loop alarm is not assigned to an alarm group, it will not be generated. See Alarms section.

Loops Loop Setup


Loop limits

This display shows all limits related to the selected loop.

Table 65 Details of loop limits

Feature Description


SP HIGH LIM* Highest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.

SP LOW LIM* Lowest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.

SP RATE UP LIM* Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a higher value. 0 to 9999 units/minute.

SP RATE DOWN LIM* Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a lower value. 0 to 9999 units/minute.

PV HIGH LIM Highest allowable PV value. –99999 to +99999

PV LOW LIM Lowest allowable PV value. –99999 to +99999

OUT HIGH LIM** Highest allowable loop output value. –5 to +105%

OUT LOW LIM** Lowest allowable loop output value. –5 to +105%

AUTOTUNE OUT HIGH LIM*** Highest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the process.

AUTOTUNE OUT LOW LIM*** Lowest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the process.

* Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias. ** Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON *** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS

Loops Loop Setup


High Output Limiting

On PID loops this feature prevents potentially damaging the product or the process by exposing material to

excessive thermal shock caused by applying the maximum PID output during initial startup or product

changeover. High output limiting is enabled by the Track digital input, and when active, limits the PID

output to a value present on the Track analog input for a user specified time period. After the time period

expires, the output limit ramps up at a user specified rate to the normal (non-override) high PID output

limit. The operator interface will indicate an OVERRIDE status at the bottom of the loop displays when

the High Output Limit is active.

The Output limiting feature is also available for Carbon Potential loops but the output limiting action is

only active after the process temperature limit has exceeded the user specified Low Temperature Limit,

which forces the output to 0% or 50% for duplex outputs.

Table 66 Details of high output limiting

Feature Description

TYPE Loop type is PID or CARBON

DIRECT or REVERSE Shows control action.


HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE ENABLE

YES: Changes the operation of track command and track value to output limit enable and output limit value.

NO: Normal output high limit is used.

HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE STATUS

ON: Digital input controlling output limiting is ON.

OFF: Digital input controlling output limiting is OFF.

CURRENT HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT % Current output high limit. When in override status, this changes according to loop’s tracking value and ramp rate. It will never exceed the loop’s normal (non-override) high output limit.

TIME IN OVERRIDE Elapsed time that High Output Limit Override Status is ON and High Output Limit Override Enable is YES. It will continue counting even after the loop’s normal output high limit is reached. It resets to zero when the Override Status changes to NO (i.e., when loop’s discrete Output Track Command turns off).

DELAY TIME (MINS) Enter number of minutes. When override status is ON, the delay time elapses before the override output limit begins to ramp up at the specified rate. Delay time of zero causes the override high output limit to track the loop’s tracking value until override status is OFF.

RAMP RATE (%/MIN) Enter %/minute rate at which the output limit will (after delay time) ramp up to the normal non-override high limit. Rate of zero causes override limit to track the loop’s tracking value during the delay time, after which high output limit steps without ramping to the normal output high limit.


Loops Loop Operation Displays


Loop Operation Displays

Overview

Loop operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 5 [8

]. A variety of

loop operation displays are available for your use to fit your application. Selection of display formats is

performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are described in this section.

The following loop operation displays are available:

Loop Operation Display See page

Loop Summary 120

Loop Control 121

Multiloop Faceplate 124

1 Loop Numeric 125

Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen 126

Loop Tune Constants display 127

A/M bias 128

Loop modes (all loop displays)

All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in

Table 67.

Table 67 Loop modes

Loop mode Meaning

AUTO RSP Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.

MAN RSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.

IMAN RSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary Cascade’s PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.

LO RSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loop’s Output Tracking value. Remote Setpoint is selected.

AUTO LSP Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.

MAN LSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.

IMAN LSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary Cascade’s PV. Local Setpoint is selected.

LO LSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loop’s Output Tracking value. Local Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.



TIP

In the Hybrid Control Designer, loops can be configured to display a specific number of decimal places for their values. A higher number of decimal places allows more precision; conversely, it limits whole numbers to the number of digits remaining to the left of the decimal point. In cases where the desired whole number is larger than can fit in the available digits, the decimal point will be moved to accommodate the new whole number. In other words, the need to enter a larger whole number takes precedence over the need for extra decimal places.

A maximum of 7 digits can be displayed, including whole numbers and decimal places.

Example Loop’s Set Point High Limit = 5000 Decimal places = 4 (therefore, 7 – 4 = 3 digits available for whole numbers)

On a loop operation display, operator wants to enter a setpoint value of 2000, a 4-digit whole number. This is one more digit than allowed by the decimal place setting. Result: The decimal place setting of 4 is ignored to allow the value of 2000 to be entered.

See also

While performing loop operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Loop summary

The Loop Summary lists a text-only overview of up to:

Model 1042 - 16 control loops

Model 559 - 8 control loops.

Table 68 Details of loop summary

Feature Description

Mode See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press Auto/Manual.

Number of loops Up to 16 loops

LOOP TAG Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to the desired loop tag and press Enter to go to the Loop Control Display of that loop (page 121).

PV Value of process variable

SP Value of setpoint. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value.

OUT Value of output. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value. Loop must be in MAN first.




Loop control

This display is accessible from all loop operating displays.

Table 69 Loop control details

Feature Description



TYPE Choices: PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M/BIAS

DIRECT/REVERSE Shows control action.


OVERRIDE ON Appears when high output limit override is active.


OUTPUT Value of output

VIEW TUNING STATUS * Select to view the status of the tuning processon the TUNING STATUS display (Table 70 below).

LOCAL SP Value of Local Setpoint

REMOTE SP Value of Remote Setpoint

SWITCH SP Select this to switch loop setpoint between Remote and Local.

RATIO GAIN** Value of Ratio Gain.


*Appears for PID and CARBON loops only.

**Appears for ratio loops only.



Tuning Status

This display shows you the current status of the Accutune III loop tuning process. It also shows you the

current values of other important loop values (Loop mode, LSP/RSP).

Please note that all of the information shown on this display is read-only.

Table 70 Details of the Tuning Status display

Feature Description

Loop mode The current mode of this loop, AUTO or MANUAL.

LSP/RSP The source of this loop’s Setpoint, Local or Remote

TUNE STATUS

Inactive – The Accutune III tuning process is not active.

Active – The Accutune III tuning progress is active.

PV ADAPTIVE TUNING

DISABLED - PV Adaptive Tuning is Disabled.

ENABLED– PV Adaptive Tuning is Enabled.

ACCUTUNE MODE

Status indication of present selection for ACCUTUNE III TYPE (DISABLED, CYCLE TUNING, or SP TUNING).



Feature Description

ACCUTUNE STATUS

ACCUTUNE III Status and Error prompts:

NOT READY - This is shown:

- When the control mode is Manual.

- For a Setpoint Tune when the difference between the PV and Setpoint is greater than 3%.

- When a Setpoint Tune is initiated and the PV is determined, by the adaptive logic to not have enough “historical data”, or the PV is moving too much to begin a Setpoint Tune. Either of these conditions will result in the Not Ready status and the Setpoint Tune algorithm will then wait until the PV is determined to be ready for the Setpoint Tune to begin.

READY - Indicates that the PV is at lineout in regards to the Setpoint. Lineout occurs when the PV is within .2% of the Setpoint value.

TUNE RUNNING - Accutune lll process still active.

ID FAILURE - SP Tune failed to properly identify the process. This usually occurs when SP Tune is initiated with a process that is moving. Retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is stable and not moving in any direction.

SP ERROR - For Cycle Tuning this occurs for Duplex, Manual Tuning when the SP value is not in the proper range. For cool side tuning the SP must be less than 48% and for heat side tuning the SP must be greater then 52% of the PV range. For SP Tune this error condition occurs if the deviation between the PV and SP is greater than 3% of the PV range when SP Tune is initiated. Retry the SP Tune after adjusting the deviation to be less than 3%.

GAIN ERROR - This error condition occurs when the process gain value (Kpg) is not within the range of 0.10 to 10. Adjust this value to 1.00 and retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is stable and not moving in any direction.

OUTPUT ERROR - For SP Tune this occurs when the initial output is not within the configured output limits. Check the SP step direction and size to make sure they are correct or modify the SP to use a value closer to the PV middle range.

PV ADT RUNNING - PV tuning is active monitoring the process.

ABORT - Current Accutune III process was aborted. An active Accutune III process will be aborted is if the loop is placed in the Manual mode.




Multiloop faceplate

The Multi-loop Faceplate displays provide loop operation information in an easy-to-read loop faceplate

format. These displays are available in a 2-loop, 3-loop, 4-loop, and 8-loop format (see Note 1). Select any

loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on that loop (page 121). Press Tab and Detail to move

cursor around the display.

Note 1. The 8-loop faceplate display is only available on Model 1042. To display 8 loops of information on

Model 559, use the 8-loop Summary display. See Page 120.

LOOPTAG1

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP


LOOPTAG2

2500.0

1500.0PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG3

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG4

2500.0

1500.0PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG5

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG6

2500.0

1500.0PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG7

2500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG8

2500.0

1500.0PV 2205.0

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5

AUTO RSP

Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only)

Table 71 Multiloop faceplate details

Feature Description


Loop Tag Name of the loop. Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Enter" to go to the Loop Control Display (page 121). Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Detail" to move cursor to the SP and OUT fields. Press "Tab" again to move cursor to next loop tag.

Vertical Bar Graphically shows value of Process Variable within its range.

2500

1500

High scale value of the PV.

Low scale value of the PV.

Arrow Graphically shows value of Setpoint


SP Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.

OUT Value of Output. You can change this only if loop is in MAN.




1 loop numeric

This display shows the selected loop. Select the loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on the

loop (page 121). Press Detail to go to the SP and OUT values.

LOOPTAG12500.0

1500.0

AUTO LSP TUNE

AL1 AL2

PV

2205.0 ENGU

SP 2000.0

OUT 83.5 %

Figure 44 Single loop numeric

Table 72 Single loop numeric details

Feature Description

Loop Tag Name of the loop. Tab to the loop tag and press Enter to go to the Loop Control Display (page 121). Press the "TAB" key to move cursor to the SP and OUT fields.


LSP / RSP Local Setpoint or Remote Setpoint indicator


AL1 AL2 Loop alarm indicators. See Loop alarm setpoints (page 116) for alarm setpoints setup.


SP Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.

OUT Value of Output. You can change this value only if loop is in MAN.




Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

This operate display shows the selected loop in a single loop faceplate format with a loop trend screen. For

details, press ENTER at this display to call up the Loop Control display (page 121). From there the first

menu item calls up the Loop Tune Constants display (page 127).

LOOPTAG111:30

AUTO RSP

PV 2205.0OUT 83.5

SP 2000.0DEV 205.0

100.0

0.0

07:35 07:55 08:15

Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

Table 73 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

Feature Description

Loop mode See Table 54 for details

Loop Tag Indicates tag number assigned to loop. Press "ENTER" from this display to select "Loop Control" display (page 121).

Setpoint of the loop.

PV bar graph on right side

Current value of PV

PV value at lower left Current value of PV

PV trend Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed in the “Loop Tune Constants” operate display.

OUT Value of loop output. Can be changed when loop is in MAN mode.

SP Setpoint value. To change, see the “Loop Control” operate display.

DEV PV’s deviation from setpoint.


TIP

This display is not available for ON/OFF control type.



Loop Tune Constants display

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.

Table 74 Details of loop tune constants display

Feature Description

GAIN #1 OR #2 * Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change (%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band

PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) # 1 OR #2 *

PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.

RATE #1 OR #2 Rate affects the controller’s output whenever the deviation is changing; and affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.

RESET #1 OR #2 Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controller’s output according to the size of the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).

FEEDFORWARD GAIN** Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).

MANUAL RESET** Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.

SET TIMEBASE Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 5 minutes, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 107) in Loops Setup for details.

*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer. **Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON.

TIP

• You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend in "Loops Setup"(page 107). Pressing Escape will return you to the "Loop Control" screen, preserving the buffered trend data.



A/M bias

This display lets you assign a bias to the loop PV. That is, OUT = PV + BIAS while loop is in AUTO.

AL1 AL2

OUT

60.1 %

PV

80.3 %

BIAS

-11.2

100.0

0.0 0.0

100.0

LOOPTAG1 AUTOAUTO/MANUAL BIAS

Figure 46 A/M bias

Table 75 A/M bias details

Feature Description


AL1 & AL2 Loop alarm indicators visible while the loop alarm conditions are active.

Loop Tag Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to OUT.

OUT 0-100 %. To adjust the output (and therefore the bias), select MAN mode, then adjust with Increment or Decrement.

Bias (OUT – PV) is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to AUTO.

PV Value of Process Variable. 0-100 %

BIAS Bias = OUT – PV. Range: –100 % to +100 %.

Bias is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to AUTO.

Left vertical bar Output

Right vertical bar PV



Summary Displays

Analog Input Summary

Access

Main menu, Summary Displays.

Description

Shows address and status of all configured analog inputs.

Table 76 Analog Input Summary details

Feature Description

ADDRESS

R M C

Physical location of the analog input (rack, module, channel).

TAG Identifies the point. Default is “AI.”

DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is “AI.”

VALUE Current value

Summary Displays Analog Input Summary


Feature Description

ERROR STATUS

Note: On Model 559 the error status, if present, will be displayed in Yellow directly below the physical address (R M C ) of the channel. This area will be blank if the channel is operating properly.

Blank: Normal operation

BURNOUT FAIL: The sensor – T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is failing burnout checks. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

CJ FAILURE: Two conditions can create this failure. 1) Both cold-junction sensors are failing. 2) The difference between the values measured by the two CJs is greater than 10 degrees C. In either case a HI CJ TEMP I/O module diagnostic is posted.

CJ HIGH TEMP: One of the CJs is indicating a high temperature reading. A HI CJ TEMP I/O module diagnostic is posted.

CJ WARNING: One of the cold-junction sensors is failing.

CONVERT FAIL: When attempting to take a reading, the analog-to digital (ADC) fails. This can occur if the incoming signal is either too large or too small. It also could result if the ADC circuit is failing. If the problem is the ADC circuit, most likely other channels will have the same failure. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

DISABLED: AI channel is programmatically disabled.

FIRMWARE REV: The firmware in the AI module is not compatible with the firmware in the controller or scanner CPU, or AI module does not support slidewire as an input type.

FORCED: The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via a PC host.

NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this channel. For example, the customer configured Channel #15 for a given module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the channel. Possible reasons are module not installed, wrong module installed, expansion rack missing, SPI backplane is failing.

OVER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% over the programmed range of the sensor.

RANGE TYPE: The AI module installed in the rack does not support the range or sensor type configured for this channel. For example, this channel’s AI function block is configured as a thermocouple, but there is a high-level AI module installed in the rack.

T/C FAILING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance indicates that the T/C’s resistance is to a point where the burnout failure will result.

T/C WARNING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance is higher than normal.

UNDER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% below the programmed range of the sensor.


Summary Displays Analog Output Summary


Analog Output Summary

Access


Description

Shows status and address of all configured analog outputs.

Table 77 Analog Output Summary details

Feature Description

ADDRESS

R M C

Physical location of the analog output (rack, module, channel).

TAG Identifies the point. Default is “AO.”

DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is “AO.”

VALUE Current value

ERROR STATUS


Blank: Normal operation

CLAMP LOW: The AO function block’s input is less than the configured low range value.

CLAMP HIGH: The AO function block’s input is greater than the configured high range value.

BAD CHANNEL:If the channel is an Analog Output: There is no physical output device connected to this channel, or the output device is showing an “open” connection. If the channel is a Pulse Output: The channel is failing to output the correct value. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

FORCED: The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via a PC host.

NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the channel. Possible reasons are:

• module not installed

• wrong module installed

• expansion rack missing

• SPI backplane is failing


Summary Displays Digital Input Summary


Digital Input Summary

Access


Description

Shows status and address of all configured digital inputs.

Table 78 Digital Input Summary details

Feature Description

ADDRESS

R M C

Physical location of the digital input (rack, module, channel).

TAG Identifies the point. Default is “DI.”

DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is “DI.”

STATE Current state

ERROR STATUS


Blank: Normal operation.

FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC host.

NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this channel. For example, Channel #15 is configured for a given module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.







Summary Displays Digital Output Summary


Digital Output Summary

Access


Description

Shows status and address of all configured digital outputs.

Table 79 Digital Output Summary details

Feature Description

ADDRESS

R M C

Physical location of the digital output (rack, module, channel).

TYPE DO: Digital Output

TPO: Time Proportional Output

3P-F: 3 Position Step-Forward

3P-R: 3 Position Step-Reverse

TAG Identifies the point. Default is “DO.”

DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is “DO.”

STATE Current state

ERROR STATUS


Blank: Normal operation.

FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC host.

NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this channel. For example, Channel #15 is configured for a given module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

OVER CURRENT: A Digital Output module detected an excessive amount of current on its output terminals. Note that this message will only appear for the 32-channel DO module. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.







Summary Displays Variable Summary


Variable Summary

Access


Description

A variable is a digital or analog tagged element of a control configuration which allows operator input to

connected function blocks. The Variable display lets you view the values or discrete statuses of variables

that affect your process.

Table 80 Variable summary details

Feature Description

TAG NAME n Name of variable.

DESCRIPTOR Optional description of the variable. If descriptor is not used, TAGNAME is repeated

Value or state The setting for an analog point can be any appropriate value from –99999 to 99999, and a digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.

Engineering Units The engineering units associated with the variable.

See also

To edit a variable, use the Overview screen. See Overview (page 274).

Summary Displays Variable Summary



Alarms

Overview

Access

Alarm displays are accessed through the main menu (Alarms/Events/Diagnostics) or Alarm key.

Alarms defined

There are two senses of the word “alarm.”

In the first sense, an alarm is a tagged discrete point that warrants operator attention. Also known as an

alarm point. Any tagged discrete point in the controller configuration can be designated as an alarm point.

The person who creates the controller configuration and the alarm displays determines which discrete

points will be alarm points.

In the second sense, an alarm occurs when an alarm point is in its alarm state and is indicated on an alarm

display.

Alarm indication

Alarms are indicated using a 4-level hierarchy.

• Red alarm indicator at the bottom of the display. This indicator appears on all displays and alerts the

operator to the presence of an alarm in the system. The red indicator flashes when any alarm exists that

has not been acknowledged; the indicator is solid (not flashing) when all alarms have been

acknowledged but their conditions still exist.

• Alarm Summary display. Provides a quick overview as to the location of alarms in the system.

• Alarm Group display. This display indicates the specific alarm(s) in an alarm group.

• Alarm Detail display. This display provides specific information on a single alarm.

Investigating alarms

Three methods are available to access the Alarm displays. The first two methods are standard; the third

method is configurable.

1. Press Alarm from any display (except alarm group) to see the Alarm Summary. Select the desired group

and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.

2. Press Menu to access the Main Menu, then select Alarms/Events/Diagnostics. Select Alarm Summary.

Select the desired group and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.

3. Configure the Display Group keys to contain Alarm Group displays as appropriate for your application.

Press the Display Group key and use Page Up and Page Down to see the Alarm Groups.

Alarms Alarm Summary


Alarm Summary

The Alarm Summary gives you the composite status of each alarm group.

Access

• Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, or

• Alarm key

Description

Table 81 Details of alarm summary

Feature Description

ALARM GROUP n Lists all alarm groups. Each group has up to 12 alarms.

Alarm Group Status UNACKED: At least one point in the alarm group is in alarm and has not been acknowledged by the operator. Press Enter to see all points in the group.

ACKED: No points in the alarm group are unacknowledged. At least one point in the alarm group is in alarm and has been acknowledged by the operator. Press Enter to see all points in the group.

CLEARED: At least one point in the alarm group was in alarm then out of alarm and was not manually acknowledged. Occurs if at least one point is configured as “manual acknowledge.” If all alarms in the group are auto acknowledge type, cleared status cannot occur.

NONE: No points in the alarm group are in alarm.

NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display for Model 559 consists of three pages of 10 groups each. Use the

page Up and Down keys to go between these pages.

Alarms Alarm Group


Alarm Group

This display shows the status of each discrete point in the selected alarm group.

Access

From Alarm Summary or from a Display Group key, if so configured.

Description


ALARM GROUP 1 MAY06

11:30

TAG-0001STATE1

TAG-0002STATE2

TAG-0003STATE1 C

TAG-0004STATE1

TAG-0005STATE2

TAG-0006STATE1

TAG-0010STATE2

TAG-0011STATE2

TAG-0012STATE1

TAG-0007STATE1

TAG-0008STATE1

TAG-0009STATE2

C

Figure 47 Alarm group display

For each alarm point the following is displayed.

• Tag name

• Current state of the point (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.)

• Alarm state. Possible states are

− Flashing LED – in alarm and unacknowledged. Applies to manual acknowledge and auto

acknowledge alarms.

− Solid LED – in alarm and was acknowledged manually while in alarm. Applies to manual

acknowledge and auto acknowledge alarms.

− C – Cleared. The point went in alarm then out of alarm and was not acknowledged. Applies to

manual acknowledge alarms, not auto acknowledge alarms.

− Blank – Not in alarm

Acknowledging alarms

To acknowledge all alarms in the group, press Alarm. If an alarmed point appears in multiple alarm groups,

you must acknowledge each group containing that point.

Manual vs. auto acknowledge

Alarm points are configured as either manual acknowledge or auto acknowledge.

When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by

the operator, it will be indicated as cleared. When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out

of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will show no indication it was in alarm.

Alarms Alarm Detail


Alarm Detail

This display shows the following details about the selected alarm point in a group:

• Tag name and description

• Last time the selected point was in alarm

• Last time the selected point went out of alarm

• Number of occurrences

• Two lines of help text

• If the selected point has not been in alarm since the Controller was reset, the following message is

displayed: NO ALARM SINCE LAST RESET.

Access

The Alarm Detail display is accessed from the Alarm Group display. See Page 139 for information about

the Alarm Group display.

With Alarm Group displayed, press Tab and Detail keys to move the cursor to the desired alarm tag. Press

Enter to show that alarm’s details. Press Escape to return to the Alarm Group display.


ALARM DETAIL MAY06

11:30TAG-0001 TAG_DESCRIPTOR

LAST TIME IN ALARM MAY 05 01 12:00:00

LAST TIME OUT ALARM MAY 06 01 08:00:00

NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES 3

1ST LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT

2ND LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT

TIP

This display does not update periodically, that is, changes to the alarm status while you are looking at this display are not shown.


Events

Event Summary

Access

Main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics to Event Summary.

Description

An event is a digital point whose transition warrants operator attention. The Event Summary shows the last

150 events.

ATTENTION

The most recent event is also shown in the event stripe at the bottom of the display. Press Enter to clear the event stripe.


EVENT SUMMARY MAY0611:30

MAY 06 11:15 TAG-9999 STAGE 2 IN PROG STARTDMAY 06 11:14 TAG-9998 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:13 TAG-9997 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2MAY 06 11:12 TAG-9996 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:11 TAG-9995 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:10 TAG-9994 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:09 TAG-9993 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:08 TAG-9992 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2MAY 06 11:07 TAG-9991 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:06 TAG-9990 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:05 TAG-9989 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2MAY 06 11:04 TAG-9988 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:03 TAG-9987 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:02 TAG-9986 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1MAY 06 11:01 TAG-9986 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1

CLEAR EVENT STRIPE

PAGE 1 OF 10

EVENT STRIPE

Figure 48 Event summary


Diagnostics

Overview

Access

All diagnostics are accessed through main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics.

Communications diagnostics are also accessible through main menu Unit Setup - See Page 159, select

"Communications".

NOTE: For diagnostics on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller, refer to Appendix A.

Diagnostic types

The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.

Diagnostics are accessed in the following hierarchy.

• Controller Diagnostics show the status of the controller’s components (Rack 1) and any expansion Racks

2-5 (page 143).

− System (Rack 1only) (page 143) - Read Only

− CPU (page 143) - Read Only

− Memory (page 144) - Read Only

− Real Time Clock (Rack 1 only) (page 144) - Read Only

− I/O - Press "Enter" for I/O Module Diagnostics. (page 145)

− Communications error messages (Rack 1only) (page 146)

• I/O Module Diagnostics show status of all I/O modules (page 147)

• Panel Diagnostics shows list of most recent diagnostics (page 154)

• Communications Diagnostics (page 155 )

� RS-232 Configuration Port (page 156)

� RS-485 OI Port (page 156)

� Network Port (page 157)

- Network Host Connections

- Network Peer Connections

� Expansion I/O Ports (page 158)

Diagnostics Controller diagnostics


Controller diagnostics

This display shows different classes of diagnostics and their statuses. Select Page Up and Page Down to

see each rack. Any rack not configured will be so indicated. Select I/O or COMM PORTS to see details.


CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5 RACK 1

SYSTEM GOODCPU WATCHDOG ERRORMEMORY GOODRTC GOODI/O GOODCOMM PORTSGOOD


CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 2 OF 5 RACK 2

CPU GOOD

MEMORY GOODI/O MODULE ERROR

Figure 49 Controller diagnostics

Table 82 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages

Class Status Possible Cause Controller Action Fix

SYSTEM GOOD N/A N/A N/A

SYSTEM FORCED OUTPUT A block has an output that is forced.

None Remove force on block output..

SYSTEM INVALID CONFIG. A configuration that exceeds the loop capacity of the controller was downloaded or an invalid configuration exists.

An empty database is created.

Download a valid configuration.

SYSTEM SWITCH FAULT A failure is detected in the switch reading.

1. All control blocks stop running

2. All I/O scanning ceases. This forces the modules into failsafe.

Replace CPU.

SYSTEM NO MASTER PORT

The controller configuration contains at least on Modbus slave block, but neither the RS-232 nor the RS-485 port is set up as a Modbus Master port.

The controller is not scanning the Modbus slave devices.

Select Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced protocol for either the RS-232 or RS-485 port.

CPU GOOD N/A N/A N/A




CPU WATCHDOG ERROR

Watchdog reset resulting from software failure

1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.

2. SYSTEM MONITOR block’s HW OK pin is turned off.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Upgrade controller module software.

3. Replace CPU board.

4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.

CPU PREFETCH ERROR

CPU failed when attempting to fetch an instruction from the prefetch register.

1. Controller performs a restart




2. Isolate system from noise and force a cold start.


CPU ADDRESS ERROR The reserved exception occurred for an unknown reason.

See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.

CPU UNDEFINED INSTR ERROR

Bad Instruction Detected

See PREFETCH ERROR See PREFETCH ERROR.

CPU DATA ABORT ERROR

CPU failed when attempting to access data.


CPU S/W INTERRUPT ERR

Software Interrupt occurred which is not supported by the software.


CPU VECTOR ERROR Corrupted interrupt vectors in RAM.

Interrupt vectors were restored.

See WATCHDOG ERROR.

MEMORY GOOD N/A N/A N/A

MEMORY 5 DAY BATTERY WARNING

Estimated battery life is less than 5 days.



Replace battery.

MEMORY LOW BATTERY Battery voltage is low. 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.

2. SYSTEM MONITOR block’s LOW BATTERY pin is turned on.


Replace battery.

MEMORY FLASH ERROR Flash failed to burn 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.




RTC GOOD N/A N/A N/A




RTC NOT PROGRAMMED

RTC not programmed 1. Time and date is set to 00:00:00, January 1, 1970.



Program RTC.

RTC BAD DATA Bad date and time See NOT PROGRAMMED.

1. Program RTC.

2. Cycle power.

3. Replace CPU.

4. Replace boards in rack.

5. Replace rack.

RTC PROGRAMMING FAILURE

RTC failed to program See NOT PROGRAMMED.

See BAD DATA.

RTC READ FAILURE Unable to read RTC See NOT PROGRAMMED.

See BAD DATA.

I/O GOOD N/A N/A N/A

I/O MODULE ERROR One of the module diagnostics in the associated rack is set to MISMATCH, BAD MODULE, BAD CHANNEL., or MISSING/NO COMM (if the communications is failing due to the module not installed—could occur if the module is installed but CPU can’t communicate to it).

Select I/O from the menu to see details on the faulty module. See I/O module diagnostics on page 147.


I/O MODULE HI CJ TEMP

One of the module diagnostics in the associated rack is set to HI CJ TEMPERATURE.



I/O FAILURE The Controller module is unable to successfully communicate to any modules that are in its SPI backplane.

All associated module diagnostics are set to MISSING/NO COMM.

See MISSING/NO COMM in Table 84 I/O Module Error Statuses on page 149 for further details.

1. Remove modules and check for bent pins on connectors.

2. Reinsert modules one at a time and note which module the diagnostic reoccurs, and replace that module.

3. Cycle power to the rack.

4. Replace the power supply.

5. Replace the rack.

6. Replace the CPU board.




I/O NO COMM The Main CPU is unable to successfully communicate to an expansion rack that is in its configuration.

See FAILURE. 1. Verify that the expansion rack should be in the configuration

2. Verify that the jumpers on the scanner are setup for the correct rack address.

3. Check that expansion rack is on.

4. Check the expansion rack’s status LED for diagnostic information.

5. Check that cable is connected to expansion rack.

6. If a hub is used, check that all cables are properly connected to the hub, proper crossover cables are used, and that hub is powered.


8. Cycle power to the hub.

9. Replace the expansion rack’s power supply.

10. Replace the expansion rack.

11. Replace the expansion rack’s scanner board.

12. Replace the main CPU.

I/O BAD VERSION The Main CPU determined that its software is not compatible with the scanner module.

All associated module diagnostics are set to MISSING/NO COMM.

Refer to MISSING/NO COMM diagnostic for further details.

1. Upgrade the scanner software either by replacing the module or doing a code-download.

2. Update Main CPU software either by replacing the module or doing a code download.

COMM GOOD N/A N/A N/A

COMM WARNING One of the comm ports is reporting an application error

Refer to Communication Ports diagnostics on page 155.


COMM FAILED One of the Comm ports is reporting a physical or data link failure



Diagnostics I/O module diagnostics


I/O module diagnostics

Access

• Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, I/O

• Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, I/O Module Diagnostics

Description

This display gives the type and status of each controller rack’s I/O modules. Select Page Up and Page

Down to see each rack and its modules.


I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5

STATUS MODULE ERRORREV LEVEL 1.00NUMBER OF SLOTS 12

MODULE PHYSICAL TYPE CONFIGURED AS ERROR STATUS

1 AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN AI

2 AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN AI BAD CHANNEL

3 DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN DI

4 DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN DI

5 DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN DI

6 DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN DO

7 DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN AI WRONG MODULE

8 DO HIGH CURRENT RELAY DO

9 DO LOW CURRENT RELAY DO BAD MODULE

10 AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN AO

11 AO CURRENT 4-CHAN AO

12 NONE DO MISSING NO COMM

RACK 1

Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view



PAGE 1 OF 5

STATUS MODULE ERRORREV LEVEL 1.00NUMBER OF SLOTS 12

RACK 1

MODULE

1

2

3

4

5

6

MODULE

7

8

9

10

11

12

ERRORERROR

AI

AI

DI

DI

DO

AI

AI

DI

DI

DI

DO

BAD CHANNEL

MISMATCH

MISSING/COMM

HI CJ TEMP

BAD MODULE

MISSING/COMM

Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view

For I/O module diagnostic details, see Table 83.



Table 83 I/O module diagnostics details

Feature Description

STATUS This status is also visible on the Controller Diagnostics display “I/O” class. See “I/O” in Table 82 (page 145) for details.

REV LEVEL Firmware revision of the rack.

NUMBER OF SLOTS Number of I/O module slots supported by the rack.

MODULE n Select to see details. See I/O Module Diagnostics physical details on page 153.

PHYSICAL TYPE * NONE

AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN

AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN

AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN

AO CURRENT 4-CHAN

AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN

DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN

DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN

DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN

DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN

DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN

DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN

DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN

AI HI-LEVEL 16-CHAN

DI 24 VDC 32-CHAN

DO 24 VDC 32-CHAN

PULSE/FREQ/QUAD 4-CHAN

CONFIGURED AS*

AI, AO, DI, DO, PFQ

ERROR STATUS*

See Table 84.

Bold items are read only

* The "Physical Type", "Configured As", and "Error Status" information is also present on the OI-559 but it is located on a detail display. To call up the detail display, cursor to the Module number field and press the ENTER key.

** Future



I/O module error status

Table 84 I/O Module Error Statuses


ERROR STATUS

HI CJ TEMP Possible causes of this diagnostic are:

1. One of the two CJs on the module is indicating a temperature reading greater than 70 degrees C.

2. Both cold-junction sensors are failing to convert.

3. The CJs are converting properly, but their differential is greater than 10 degrees C.

1. Associated AI blocks that are configured as T/Cs set their fail pin on, their warn pin off, and their output pin to the failsafe value.

2. Associated AI blocks that are configured as T/Cs set their IO status to “CJ High Temperature” for reason 1 or “CJ Failure” for possible causes 2 and 3.

3. Associated rack monitor block’s module fail pin is turned on.


5. Associated rack monitor block’s HITEMP pin is turned on.

6. SYSTEM MONITOR block’s HITEMP pin is turned on.


1. Improve ventilation to rack

2. Replace AI module

ERROR STATUS

MISMATCH The installed module does not agree with the module required for the control strategy downloaded in the configuration file.

1. Associated blocks set their fail pin on, their warn pin off, and their output pin to the failsafe value.

2. Associated blocks set their IO status to “Channel No Comm”.




1. Verify configuration

2. Replace module with the correct one.




ERROR STATUS

MISSING/NO COMM

Main CPU is unable to communicate to the module for one of the following reasons:

1. Module is not installed

2. The module cannot communicate with the controller CPU or the expansion rack CPU because of a backplane problem.

3. Module is on an expansion rack and the expansion rack communications is failing

See MISMATCH. Action is based on the RACK STATUS indication. If RACK STATUS is not MODULE ERROR, then follow the prescribed action defined for the RACK STATUS diagnostic.

For MODULE ERROR, do the following:

1. Verify configuration

2. Install module.

ERROR STATUS

BAD MODULE Module is reporting a diagnostic condition. See Table 85.

See MISMATCH. User should inspect the module’s status LED to determine the nature of the problem. Table 85 describes the user action for the various LED diagnostics.

ERROR STATUS

BAD CHANNEL See Table 86 1. Associated block sets its fail pin on, its warn pin off, and its output pin to the failsafe value.

2. Associated block sets its IO status as denoted in Table 86.




See Table 86



Bad module details

When an I/O module’s error status is BAD MODULE, the module’s status LED is flashed red with a

number of quick strobes followed by a long off time. Table 85 outlines the potential module diagnostics.

Table 85 Bad module details

Number of

Strobes

Failure Description AI AO DI DO PFQ User Action

Contact AC DC Relay AC DC

1 FAIL SAFE The module is in the failsafe state

because it is not receiving message requests from the CPU or Scanner

at a rate that satisfies the configured failsafe timeout.

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 1. If expansion I/O rack, go to step 2. If

no expansion I/O rack, go to step 3.

2. Check the Scanner status LED (see

Scanner Indicators in HC900 Hybrid Controller manual, #51-52-25-107).

If it’s flashing 6 times, proceed with step 3. If it’s flashing some other red

status code (refer to Scanner Indicators in HC900 Hybrid Controller manual, #51-52-25-107)

to solve that problem first. If it’s flashing green, the module probably is not required in the

configuration. If it’s not on or steady, cycle power to the scanner.

3. Make sure the module is the correct one for the configuration.

4. Remove the module and check for a bent pin, then reinsert the module

5. Replace the module

6. Remove other modules and replace

one at a time until the problem reoccurs. Most likely the last module inserted needs to be replaced.

7.Replace the rack.

2 EAROM EA ROM Failed its checksum √ √ 1. Remove/reinsert module.

2. Replace module.

3 RAM √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

4 ROM √ √ √ √ √ √ √

5 +24 V √ √ √ √ 1. Remove the module and check

for a bent pin, then reinsert the module

2. Measure power supply voltage. If not correct, replace power supply.

3. Replace module

4. Replace rack

6 FACTORY CAL CRC failure of primary and backup

factory calibration √ √ Replace module.

7 FIELD CAL CRC failure of field calibration

values √ √ 1. Remove/reinsert module.

2. Replace module.

8 HARDWARE General Hardware Failure (AI=convertor not working)

√ Replace module.

9 HW/SW Key The software residing on the

module does not match the module type. This diagnostic should only result in the factory.

√ √ √ √ √ Replace module

11 Shift Register The loopback test of the shift

register failed.

√ √ √ √ √ √ Replace module



Bad channel details

Below is a list of conditions that can cause a BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic.

Table 86 Bad Channel details

I/O Summary Error Status Description User Action

Bad Channel If the channel is an Analog Output: There is no physical output device connected to this channel, or the output device is showing an open connection.

If the channel is a Pulse Output: The channel is failing to output the correct value.

A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

Check terminal block connections.

Replace module.

Burnout Fail The sensor – T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is failing burnout checks. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

Check terminal block connections

Replace source element

Replace module.

Convert Fail When attempting to take a reading, the analog-to-digital (ADC) fails. This can occur if the incoming signal is either too large or too small. It also could result if the ADC circuit is failing. If the problem is the ADC circuit, most likely other channels will have the same failure. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

Check the signal level being applied to the terminals.

Replace module.

No Channel There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this channel. For example, the customer configured Channel #15 for a given module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.

Over Current A Digital Output module detected an excessive amount of current on its output terminals. Note that this message will only appear for the 32-channel DO module. A BAD CHANNEL module diagnostic is posted.

Diagnostics I/O Module Diagnostics physical details


I/O Module Diagnostics physical details

Access

Select any module number on the I/O Module Diagnostics display to see the details.

Table 87 I/O module diagnostic details

Feature Description

TYPE NONE

AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN

AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN

AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN

AO CURRENT 4-CHAN

AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN

DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN

DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN

DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN

DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN

DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN

DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN

DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN

AI HI-LEVEL 16-CHAN

DI 24 VDC 32-CHAN

DO 24 VDC 32-CHAN

PULSE/FREQ/QUAD 4-CHAN

PART NUMBER The re-order part number of the module.

REV LEVEL Revision level of the firmware running on this module.

CONFIGURED AS (Model 559 only)

AI, AO, DI, DO, PFQ

ERROR STATUS (Model 559 only)

See Table 84.

Diagnostics Panel diagnostic log


Panel diagnostic log

The Panel Diagnostic Log is a time-ordered list of the diagnostic messages that appear on the status line (at

the bottom of the display). The log is cleared when the user selects the DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS

item.


PANEL DIAGNOSTIC LOG MAY0611:30

MAY 05 20:51 CONTROLLER DIAG




MAY 05 20:25 ALARM/EVENT LOST

DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS

Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log

Diagnostics Communication Ports diagnostics


Communication Ports diagnostics

Access

• Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Communications

• Main menu, Unit Setup, Communications - See 168

NOTE: For Communications Ports S1/S2/E1/E2 Diagnostics on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller,

refer to Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays.

Overview

This section discusses only the diagnostics part of those displays. Refer to Communication Ports on page

168 for other details.


COMMUNICATION PORTSCOMMUNICATION PORTS

SERIAL PORT S1 GOOD

SERIAL PORT S2 (OI) GOOD

NETWORK PORT GOOD

EXPANSION I/O PORT GOOD

MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES

Figure 53 Communication ports

At this screen each port’s status is displayed. Select a port, Press Enter to see details. Refer to "Unit

Setup", "Communication Ports" on page 168 for details on each port.

Diagnostics and Status Messages Only

• Serial Port S1 (page 156) - Details listed on Page 169.

• Serial Port S2 (OI) (page 156) - Details listed on Page 172

• Network port (page 157) - Details listed on Page 173

− View network host connections - Details listed on Page 174

− View network peer connections - Details listed on Page 175

♦ Network peer statistics - Details listed on Page 176

• Expansion I/O port (page 158) - Details listed on Page 179



Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI)

The list of diagnostics for these two ports is the same.

Table 88 Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI) diagnostics and statuses


PORT DIAGNOSTIC

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

APPLICATION ERROR

At least one response to a host resulted in an exception code or NAK.

1. Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to WARNING.

2. Rack 1 monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.


At host, determine which message is causing the exception code and fix it.

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

DATA LINK ERROR

A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors.

1. Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.



1. Check baud rate.

2. Check connectors.

3. Check cable polarity.

4. Isolate cable from electrical interference.

5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter used, check its power, switch/jumper settings, and polarity.

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

HARDWARE FAILURE

The DUART is failing to operate properly.

Replace the controller CPU module.



Network Port

Table 89 Network Port diagnostics


PORT DIAGNOSTIC

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

SETUP ERROR Controller/network names determined on network are illegal

Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.

Rack 1 monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.

ASYS (SYSTEM MONITOR) block’s HW OK pin is turned off.

Correct the setup problem.

NO IP ADDRESS IP address is not configured

Same as above 1. If a DHCP server is present, download a configuration that uses DHCP.

2. Enter an IP address.

HARDWARE FAILURE

Ethernet port tests failed during power-up.

Same as above Replace CPU module

DHCP Failure DHCP is configured, and no IP address has been granted.

Same as above 1. Check the DHCP server.

2. Download a configuration with DHCP required.



Expansion I/O Port

Table 90 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics


RACK n PORT

GOOD Comm port is functioning properly or comm port is not used

N/A N/A

RACK n PORT

DATA LINK FAILURE

The communications to a particular rack is resulting in a lot of communication errors.

1. Related rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.

2. Depending on the nature of the communication errors, the associated rack monitor block’s module diagnostics, and pins could be affected.

3. Associated rack’s COMPORT DIAGNOSTIC is set to FAILED.

4. Rack 1 COMPORT DIAGNOSTIC is set to FAILED.

1. Use the OI to determine which rack is experiencing the comm errors. Verify that the expansion rack should be in the configuration

2. Verify that the jumpers on the scanner are setup for the correct rack address.

3. If a hub is used, check that all cables are properly connected to the hub, proper crossover cables are used, and that hub is powered.





8. Replace the expansion rack’s scanner board.


RACK n PORT

HARDWARE FAILURE

The power-up test of the expansion rack Ethernet controller failed.

1. All rack monitor block XIO PORT DIAG are set to HWFAIL and COMPORT DIAGNOSTIC is set to FAIL.

2. All rack monitor block RACK OK pins are turned off.

3. All modules in the configuration have their diagnostic set to MOD_NOCOMM, their rack monitor module fail pin is turned on., and the rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.


5. The statuses for the AO, AI, DI, DO channels that are affected are set to BAD_CHANNEL.

Replace main-CPU module


Unit Setup

Access

Main menu.

Description

Unit Setup gives you access to the setup and troubleshooting functions.


CONTROLLER STATUSSET MODEWRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORYSET TIME AND DATESET SECURITYREVIEW SECURITYSET LANGUAGECOMMUNICATION PORTSFILE NAME SELECTIONSSELF-TESTSCALIBRATE AICALIBRATE AOCHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

UNIT SETUPUNIT SETUP MAY0611:30

Unit Setup Controller Status


Controller Status

This is a read-only display giving the status of various controller parameters.

Table 91 Controller status details

Feature Description

CONTROLLER NAME

Configured controller name

NETWORK NAME The network name to which the controller belongs.

LOCAL ALIAS A locally referenced alias for the controller.

MODE Controller’s mode of operation:

RUN: Controller is running normally.

PROG: Controller is in Program mode.

OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode.

FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch.

NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding.

REV LEVEL Revision level of the Controller software.

FREQUENCY Line frequency. Used for configuring the conversion time of the A/D converter.

LOOP CAPACITY Maximum number of loops allowed by the controller.

CYCLE TIME The analog control cycle time in seconds. This value is determined from the execution time estimated from the configured control scheme.

Set Mode

This display lets you change the Controller’s operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom

right of the display.

Table 92 Set mode details

Feature Description

CONTROLLER MODE Current mode of the controller. See Table 93.

SET CONTROLLER MODE

RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.

PROGRAM: Select this:

• Before performing AI and AO Calibration.

• To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.

Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the Program mode for changes whenever possible.

Unit Setup Set Mode


Table 93 Controller modes defined

Mode Function Blocks Executed? Output status? Effect upon return to RUN mode?

RUN Yes Outputs updated None

OFFLINE No Outputs held Resume

PROGRAM No Outputs off Cold start

ATTENTION

You cannot change the controller mode from this display if the controller’s mode switch is in the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked positions, this display will show the message “MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.”

TIP

• If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here, following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.

• Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules, sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.

• In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.

• In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left off.

Unit Setup Write Database to Flash Memory


Write Database to Flash Memory

Overview

This utility allows you to save any parameters that you may have changed in the controller to the

controller’s non-volatile Flash memory. The affected parameters include:

• Loop tuning parameters (gain, rate, reset, etc.)

• Changes to Recipes, Profiles, Schedules, and Sequences.

ATTENTION

This utility can only be used if the controller is in the Run, Run Locked, or Offline Mode.

Procedure

Table 94 Write Database to Flash Memory

Step Action Result

1 From Main Menu, select “UNIT SETUP” then select “WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY”.

2 Press “ENTER”. You will see: WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

PRESS ENTER TO START

PRESS ESC TO ABORT

WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

PRESS ENTER TO START

PRESS ESC TO ABORT

3 Press “ENTER” to start. You will see: WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

WRITE IN PROGRESS

WAIT


WRITE IN PROGRESS

WAIT

4 When write is complete, you will see WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

FLASH UPDATE IS COMPLETE

PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP


FLASH UPDATE IS COMPLETE


5 Press “ESC” to close pop-up Returns to “UNIT SETUP” screen

Failure

If an error occurs you will see the following message on the OI:

ERROR: FLASH UPDATE FAILED.

This message will appear in the same location on the display as the "Write in progress" and the "Flash

update is complete" messages.

If the write fails, press ESC and try the operation again. If the write continues to fail, upload the

controller's configuration to the PC (using HC Designer) and save the uploaded configuration to disk to

make sure that you have captured all of the non-volatile parameter changes.

Unit Setup Set Time and Date


Set Time and Date

Allows you to set the time and date displayed on screens.

Table 95 Set time and date details

Feature Description

HOURS Enter the hours for the current time.

MINUTES Enter the minutes for the current time.

MONTH Enter the current month.

DAY Enter the current day of the month.

YEAR Enter the current year.

DATE FORMAT US: MMDDYY

INT: DDMMYY

Press Escape to get a popup menu where you can save or ignore the changes made.

Set Security/Review Security

This feature lets you secure various displays or features with a security code. If security is enabled for a

display or function, access is not possible without first entering the code.

NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.

Table 96 Set security details

Feature Description

ENABLE SECURITY This is a master-enabling switch. Set this to YES to enable security on any of the engineer or operator secured items that are also set to YES. If this is set to NO, no engineer or operator secured items will be secured, even if they are set to YES.

ENGINEER SEC CODE

This is a higher level of security than the operator security code because it secures access to “off-line” functions such as calibration. Choose a 3-digit code to be used to secure the item below.

SET UNIT Set this to YES to secure the displays and menu items in Table 97 under SET UNIT. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access.

FUNCTION BLOCK EDIT

Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA EDIT displays. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

EDIT MENUS Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA operate display Edit menus. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

OPERATOR SEC CODE

Enter a 3-digit code to be used to secure the items below.

AUTO/MANUAL Set this to YES to secure loop mode AUTO/MANUAL operation. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

Unit Setup Set Security/Review Security


Feature Description

LSP/RSP Set this to YES to secure changing between Local and Remote Setpoints. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

PROGRAMMER/ SCHEDULER/ SEQUENCER/ CALENDAR OPERATIONS

Set this to YES to secure setpoint program, scheduler, sequencer operation, and calendar event. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

SETUP Set this to YES to secure access to setup items. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

RECIPE LOAD/ VAR. EDIT

Set this to YES to secure recipe and variable operation. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

DISK UTIL / DATA STORAGE

Set this to YES to secure access to disk utilities, data storage controls, and load data storage settings). Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

LOG ON/OFF Set this to YES to secure access to the Log On/Off display. See Table 97 for affected items.

Accessing a secured area

1. The security access display is shown when you are about to enter a secured area.

2. Use Increment/Decrement and Left Arrow to select the code. Press Enter to gain access.

TIP

1. If you forget your security code, see Security Bypass Procedure.

2. An item is secured only if all the following conditions are met.

− ENABLE SECURITY is set to YES.

− Non-zero security code.

− Security category (for example, SETUP) is set to YES.

3. If a display or function is secured, then all displays and functions subordinate to it are also indirectly secured. Once you enter the security code for a display or menu, you do not have to enter a security code for each subordinate display and function. For example, Loops is under the SETUP security category. If SETUP security is enabled with YES, the operator must enter the operator security code after selecting Loops from the Main Menu. Once this code is entered, all menus and displays under Loops are accessible.

Table 97 summarizes the securable displays and menu items.



Table 97 Displays and functions that can be secured

ENG SEC CODE OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

SET UNIT

FB EDIT

EDIT MENUS

AUTO/ MAN

LSP / RSP

SET-UP

PROGRAMMER/ SCHEDULER/ SEQUENCER/ CALENDAR

OPERATIONS

RECIPE / VAR EDIT

DISK UTIL/ DATA STOR-AGE

LOG ON/OFF

UNIT SETUP*

SET MODE X


X

SET TIME & DATE X

SET SECURITY X

COMMUNICATION PORTS

SERIAL PORT S1 X

SERIAL PORT S2 (OI) X

NETWORK PORT E1 X

NETWORK PORT E2 X

FILE NAME

SELECTION

X

SELF-TESTS X

CALIBRATE AI X

CALIBRATE AO X

RS-232 CONFIG PORT** X

RS-485 CONFIG PORT** X

MODBUS SLAVE

DEVICES**

X

SINGLE LOOP TREND

DISPLAY

X

LOOP TUNING DISPLAY X

LOOP TUNE CONSTANTS

DISPLAY

X

LOOP CONTROL SETUP

DISPLAY

X

SWITCH SP X

CARBON LOOP SETUP

DISPLAY

X

LOOP ALARM SETPTS

DISPLAY

X

LOOP LIMITS DISPLAY X

MULTILOOP SUMMARY DISPLAY

X

MULTILOOP FACEPLATE

DISPLAYS

X

SINGLE LOOP NUMERIC

DISPLAY

X

A/M BIAS DISPLAY X

LOOP CONTROL DISPLAY X

SWITCH SP X

RECIPES*

EDIT X

LOAD X



ENG SEC CODE OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

SET UNIT

FB EDIT

EDIT MENUS

AUTO/ MAN

LSP / RSP

SET-UP

PROGRAMMER/ SCHEDULER/ SEQUENCER/ CALENDAR

OPERATIONS

RECIPE / VAR EDIT

DISK UTIL/ DATA STOR-AGE

LOG ON/OFF

MAIN MENU

LOOPS X

SP PROGRAMMERS X

SP SCHEDULER X

SEQUENCERS X

DISK UTILITIES X

DATA STORAGE*

STORAGE CONTROLS X

LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS X

SINGLE SPP OPERATE DISPLAY

OPERATE X

SETPOINT SCHEDULER

OPERATE

X

SEQUENCER OPERATE X

CALENDAR EVENT

OPERATE

X

RAMP EDIT DISPLAY

TRANSFER RATE UP X

TRANSFER RATE DN X

LAG TIME X

STAGE EDIT DISPLAY

ON DELAY TIME X

OFF DELAY TIME X

INTERLOCK PREV X

INTERLOCK NEXT X

ALTERNATOR EDIT DISPLAY

EDIT ALTERNATOR (F2) X

EDIT ALTERNATOR STYLE X

RECIPE LOAD DISPLAY X

DEVICE CONTROL

OPERATE DISPLAY

X

DEVICE CONTROL EDIT

DISPLAY

EDIT TIMERS X

RESET FAILURE X

HOA OPERATE DISPLAY X

HOA EDIT DISPLAY

HOA SOURCE X

SET STATE X

OVERVIEW DISPLAY X

LOG ON/OFF

*Accessed through Main Menu.

** These displays are accessed via the following sequence of menu items: Main Menu, Alarms/Events/Diags,

Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports and Main Menu, Unit Setup, Communications.

X = this item and items subordinate to it can be secured.

Unit Setup Set Language


Set Language

Sets the language of all displays.

Attention: This option is available on model 1042 only.

Table 98 Set language details

Feature Description

SET LANGUAGE Choose between English, French, Italian, Spanish, and German.

Unit Setup Communication Ports


Communication Ports

Access

• Main menu, Unit Setup

• Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports - See 155

NOTE: For Communications Ports S1/S2/E1/E2 on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller, refer to

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays.

Overview

This menu lets you see and edit settings for these controller communications ports:

• Serial Port S1 (page 169)

• Serial Port S2 (OI) (page 172)

• Network port (page 173)

− View host connections (page 174)

− View network peer connections (page 175)

♦ Network peer statistics (page 176)

• Expansion I/O port (page 179).

• Modbus Slave Devices (page 180)

• Modbus Slave Details (page 180)



SERIAL PORT S1 GOOD


NETWORK PORT GOOD

EXPANSION I/O PORT GOOD


Figure 54 Communications ports display

The diagnostic condition of each port is displayed to the right of the port description. See the section on

Communication Ports Diagnostics (page 155) for an explanation of these diagnostic conditions.

To access the detailed information for any port, scroll to the desired port and press ENTER.

If the controller’s Serial Port S1 is being used to host one or more Modbus Slave devices the message NO

MASTER PORT may appear next to the MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES menu item. This message indicates

that the protocol for this port is set to a value other than “Modbus Master” or “Modbus Master Advanced.”

Call up the Serial Port S1 display and set the protocol to “Modbus Master” or “Modbus Master Advanced.”



Serial Port S1

The controller’s Serial Port S1 can be set-up as an ELN Configuration port, a Modbus Master port, or a

Modbus Slave port. The ELN protocol allows the controller to communicate with the Hybrid Control

Designer package on the PC using the proprietary ELN protocol. The Modbus Master protocols allow the

controller to act as a Modbus Master, retrieving data from other instruments that have been configured as

Modbus slave devices. The three Modbus Slave protocols allow the controller act as a slave to various host

devices, including a PC running HC Designer.

Table 99 describes the diagnostic and status information available for this port.

The information presented in Table 99, Table 100 and Table 101 also applies to Serial Port S1 when a

Redundant Controller is used with the OI. Refer to Appendix A - page 289 for more information about the

Redundant Controller displays.

Table 99 Serial Port S1 diagnostic and status information

Status Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows the overall condition of the Serial Port S1. See the list of Seial Port S1 diagnostic conditions on page 156.

PORT STATUS This is the current status of the port. The possible status conditions are:

GOOD: the protocol is set to ELN.

REQUIRES SETUP: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the Slave Address is set to 255. Messages on the communication link are ignored in this state.

OFFLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the Slave Port Enable is set to DISABLE. Messages on the communication link are ignored in this state.

ONLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the Slave Port Enable is set to ENABLE. Messages on the communication link are being processed in this state.

NO MODBUS SLAVE BLOCKS: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, but there are no Modbus slave function blocks present in the controller’s configuration.

PROGRAM MODE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, but the controller is in Program Mode. The controller does not scan the slave devices in this state.

ELN SLAVE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, but the controller is in Program Locked Mode. The port automatically reverts to ELN protocol and the controller becomes a slave device whenever the mode selection switch is placed in the Program Locked position.

SCANNING SLAVES: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the controller is actively scanning the slave devices attached to the port.

MESSAGES RECEIVED The number of messages that were received and processed correctly.

DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller. If the protocol is Modbus Master, the errors may be due to a slave device that does not reply when it is scanned. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting Data Link Errors” (page 182) for more information.

APPLICATION ERRORS

The number of messages that were responded to with an exception code. For example, application errors can be caused by (a) writing to a read-only register, (b) accessing a register that is not supported by the slave device, or (c) using a Modbus function code that is not supported by the slave device.



Table 100 shows all of the parameters that can be configured for the controller’s Serial Port S1. The actual

number of parameters that can be configured at any time depends on the protocol selected. Table 101

shows the relationship between the setup parameters and each protocol.

Table 100 Serial Port S1 setup parameters

Setup parameter Description

PROTOCOL ELN: The default protocol, used to communicate with the HC Designer configuration software.

MODBUS MASTER: The controller acts as a Modbus Master device on the communication link.

MB MASTER ADVANCED: The controller acts as a Modbus Master device on the communication link. This protocol provides enhanced data throughput for applications where the HC900 is being used with a “Modbus-to-fieldbus” gateway device.

MODBUS SLAVE MULTI: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave device. This protocol allows more than one slave device to be present on the communications link (multi-drop).

MODBUS SLAVE PTP: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave device. This protocol can be used if the controller is the only slave device on the link (Point-to-point).

MODBUS SLAVE MODEM: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave device. This protocol provides the extended delays that are needed to access the controller via a modem.

This is the address of the controller on the Modbus link when one of the three Modbus Slave protocols is selected. All devices on the link must have a unique Modbus address. The address may be set to a value of 1 to 247, or it may be set to 255. A value of 255 disables the port for this controller.

SLAVE PORT ENABLE This item allows you to enable or disable the port:

ENABLE: The port will respond to communication requests.

DISABLE: The port will ignore communication requests.

BAUD RATE (BPS) Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bits per second.

MODBUS PARITY Select None, Odd, or Even parity.

MODBUS STOP BITS Select 1 or 2 Stop Bits.

DOUBLE REGISTER FORMAT Under the Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating-point number requires two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes. The stuffing order of the bytes within these registers differs among Modbus devices. To provide compatibility with the various hosts, the double-register format is configurable. The selections are:

FP B Big Endian format Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1 FP L Little Endian format Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4 FP BB Big Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2 FP LB Little Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3

CLEAR STATISTICS This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero (Messages Received, Data Link Errors, and Application Errors). Note: the counters will only be reset if the controller is in Run Mode.



Table 101 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the Serial Port S1

Setup parameter

Protocol selection

ELN Modbus Master or Modbus Master

Advanced

Modbus Slave

Multidrop

Modbus Slave Point to Point

(PTP)

Modbus Slave Modem

Baud Rate (BPS) X X X X X

Modbus Parity X X X NONE

Modbus Stop Bits X X X 1 BIT

Slave Address X X X

Slave Port Enable X X X

Double Register Format X X X

Note: When “Modbus Slave Modem” protocol is selected, the Modbus Parity and Modbus Stop Bits are fixed at “None” and “1 Bit” respectively and cannot be changed.



Serial Port S2 (OI)

The information presented in Table 102 also applies to Serial Port S2 when a Redundant Controller is used

with the OI. Refer to Appendix A - page 289 for more information about the Redundant Controller displays.

Table 102 Serial Port S2 (OI) details

Feature Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows condition of OI port. See OI Port diagnostics on page 156

PORT STATUS Shows status of port (GOOD).

MESSAGES RECEIVED Number of messages that were received and processed correctly.

DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller (framing, overrun, etc). These errors could be caused by electrical noise on the communications link or a bad physical connection.”

APPLICATION ERRORS Number of messages that were responded to with an exception error by the controller.

PROTOCOL ELN

BAUD RATE (BPS) The current communication speed of the port, 38400 or 57600 bits per second.

BAUD RATE (BPS) This item allows you to change the speed of the communication link that connects the OI and the controller. The choices are 38400 or 57600 bits per second.

CLEAR STATISTICS This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero (Messages Received, Data Link Errors, and Application Errors). Note: the counters will only be reset if the controller is in Run Mode.




Network Port

Table 103 Network port details

Feature Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows condition of network port. See Network Port diagnostics on page 157

CONTROLLER NAME Configured controller name



MAC ADDRESS The controller’s Media Access Control address.

IP ADDRESS The controller’s Internet Protocol address.

SUBNET MASK The controller’s subnet mask address.

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS The Internet Protocol address for the controller’s gateway device.

DOUBLE REGISTER FORMAT

Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes, MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is configurable. Selections are:

FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order – 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default)

FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order – 3, 4, 1, 2

FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order – 1, 2, 3, 4

FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order – 2, 1, 4, 3

VIEW HOST CONNECTIONS

Shows the network host connections display. See View Host Connections, Table 104

VIEW PEER CONNECTIONS

Shows the network peer connections display. See View Peer Connections, Table 106




View Host Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each virtual connection’s status and details.


NETWORK HOST CONNECTIONS

CONNECTION 1: GOOD PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP

HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4 MESSAGES RECEIVED 100

APPLICATION ERRORS 0 CLEAR STATISTICS



APPLICATION ERRORS 0

CLEAR STATISTICS



APPLICATION ERRORS 0

CLEAR STATISTICS

CONNECTION 4: GOOD

PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4

MESSAGES RECEIVED 100 APPLICATION ERRORS 0

CLEAR STATISTICS



APPLICATION ERRORS 0 CLEAR STATISTICS

Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*)

Table 104 View network host details

Feature Description

CONNECTION n Shows condition of each virtual connection. See Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators, Table 105

PROTOCOL * The protocol used by the host to communicate with the controller (Modbus TCP).

HOST IP ADDRESS * The IP address of the host device that is using this connection.

MESSAGES RECEIVED * Number of messages received without errors.

APPLICATION ERRORS* Number of message requests that resulted in an exception.

CLEAR STATISTICS * Resets to zero the number of messages received and application errors.


* For Model 559, select a connection number and press "Enter" to display connection information.



Table 105 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators

Parameter Status Possible Cause Controller Action User Action

Network Host Connections Diagnostics

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

APPLICATION ERROR

At least one response to a host resulted in an exception code.

1. Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to WARNING.

2. Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.

3. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off

At host, determine which message is causing the exception code and fix.

View Peer Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each peer’s address and diagnostic.

Table 106 View peer connection details

Feature Description

CONTROLLER NAME Scroll to any controller name and press Enter to see statistics. See Table 107

IP ADDRESS Internet Protocol address of the peer controller.

STATUS See Host/Peer Connection Status Indicators, Table 108




View Network Peer statistics

Accessed from View Peer Connections display.

Table 107 View network peer statistics details

Feature Description

PEER CONTROLLER NAME

Controller name of the peer device. All peer devices must have the same network name. All peer devices that share a common network name must have unique controller names.

PEER IP ADDRESS IP address of the peer. The IP address is automatically determined when a peer device is discovered via its network and controller names.

STATUS See Peer Connection Status Indicators, Table 108

MESSAGES RECEIVED Number of messages received from the peer device.

MESSAGES TRANSMITTED

Number of messages sent to the peer device.

WRITE REQUESTS Number of write event messages sent to the peer device.

WRITE REQUEST FAILURES

Number of write event messages that have not been acknowledged by the peer device within the scan rate configured for the peer data exchange. A non-zero value means the network is congested and message transfer is being impeded.

PRODUCER FAILURES Number of times the peer device has not responded to a data exchange connection request. Non-zero value means the peer device is not available because the controller is in Program mode, controller power is off, or controller name does not exist in the network. The network is defined as all devices that:

• are on the same physical network,

• are within the IP address range per the configured IP mask,

• share the same peer network name.

CLEAR STATISTICS Reset to zero the number of messages received and application errors.




Table 108 Peer Connection Status Indicators

Parameter Status Possible Cause Controller Action User Action

Network Peer Connections Diagnostics

GOOD N/A Peer is connected and updating normally

N/A

APPLICATION ERROR

The peer connection could not be established due to an internal program problem.

N/A 1. Reset the controller to restart the UDP/IP protocol stack and reset buffer allocations.

2. Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists.

SETUP ERROR

The peer device indicated that the one or more data item is not valid.

The error will occur when an incompatibility exists between peer devices with regard to variable or signal assignments.

This error should not occur when exchanging data between HC900 controllers.

Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the status occurs.

PEER FAIL The assigned peer

could not be located on the network.

N/A 1. Check the controller name and network name of the peer device to assure that they match that specific PDE block.

2. Check that the IP addresses of the peer devices are all within the range of the IP mask.

3. Check that the peer devices have the same IP subnet mask. See Network parameters for IP mask setting.

continued

PORT FAIL The peer data exchange IO subsystem could not be started due to internal resource problem.

N/A 1. Reset the controller to restart the Ethernet IO hardware and reassign processor IO mapping.

2. Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists.



NOT STARTED

The assigned peer IO connection has not yet been attempted. Normal state during startup and during configuration mode. This status should automatically change to GOOD after both peer controllers are in the RUN mode.

1. If this status persists during run time, check that the peer device is properly connected and that the control name and network name is correct.

2. Check that the IP masks of all peer devices to assure that all IP addresses are within the same subnet.

3. Check that all external network components such as switches and routers allow passing of UDP packets on port 502.

4. Check that the peer device is powered on and is in RUN mode.



Expansion I/O Port


COMMUNICATION PORT

EXPANSION I/O PORT

DIAGNOSTICS 1 GOOD H/W FAIL GOOD GOOD

MESSAGES 1000 200 300 200 300

LINK ERRORS 0 0 0 0 0

TOTAL RACK 2 RACK 3 RACK 4 RACK 5

CLEAR ALL CLEAR 2 CLEAR 3 CLEAR 4 CLEAR 5

Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections


EXPANSION I/O PORTS

RACK 2 DIAGNOSTICS H/W/FAIL

MESSAGES 0

LINK ERRS 0

CLEAR STATISTICS

PAGE 1 OF 3

RACK 3 DIAGNOSTICS H/W/FAIL

MESSAGES 0

LINK ERRS 0

CLEAR STATISTICS

Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections

On Model 559 use Page up and Page down to view Rack 4, Rack 5, and Total Diagnostics

Table 109 Expansion I/O Port details

Feature Description

DIAGNOSTICS TOTAL: Total number of all rack diagnostics other than “Good.”

RACK n: See Expansion I/O Port on page 158 for explanation of the status.

MESSAGES TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks.

RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack.

LINK ERRORS TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks that resulted in failed response.

RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack that resulted in failed response.

CLEAR ALL Reset to zero the Messages and Link Errors counters.

CLEAR STATISTICS Reset the messages and link error counters for a single rack to zero.




Modbus Slave Devices display

This display gives you an overview of the individual slave devices attached to the controller’s RS-232 port

when the port is set-up as a Modbus Master. Table 110 describes the information located on this display.

Table 110 Modbus Slave Devices display

Display Field Description

SLAVE DEVICE This column shows the name of the slave device and its relative position (1 through 16).

Use the arrow keys to select an individual slave device to get more detailed status information. Press ENTER to call-up the Modbus Slave Details display.

IN SCAN This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.

YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan rate is computed by the controller.

NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not being scanned at all. The status may be NO for any of the following reasons:

• the ENABLE SCAN setting is NO (see the Modbus Slave Details display).

• the COMM QUALITY for this slave device is BAD or NONE (see the Modbus Slave Details display).

• the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.

• the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.

• the RS-232 port protocol is not set to one of the Modbus Master protocols.

Modbus Slave Details display

This display allows you to see the status of an individual slave device and place the slave device in and out

of scan. You can access this display from the Modbus Slave Devices overview display. Table 111

describes the information present on this display.



Table 111 Modbus Slave Details display

Display Field Description

IN SCAN This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.

YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan rate is computed by the controller.

NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not being scanned at all. The possible reasons are:

• SCAN ENABLED is set to NO.

• COMM QUALITY is NONE or BAD.

• the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.

• the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.

• The RS-232 port protocol is not set to one of the Modbus Master protocols.

SCAN ENABLED YES: Scanning has been enabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection below)

NO: Scanning has been disabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection below)

COMM QUALITY NONE: This slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.

GOOD: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate because its operation on the communications link is acceptable.

BAD: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate because it has experienced an abnormal number of failed responses. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting a Comm Quality Problem” below.

MESSAGES RECEIVED The number of messages that were received and processed correctly since the last Cold Start.

DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors generated by this slave since the last Cold Start. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting Data Link Errors” for more information.

APPLICATION ERRORS The number of application errors generated by this slave since the last Cold Start. Application errors are messages that the slave device responded to with an exception code. For example, application errors can be caused by (a) writing to a read-only register, (b) accessing a register that is not supported by the slave device, or (c) using a Modbus function code that is not supported by the slave device.


Under Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating-point number requires two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes. The stuffing order of the bytes within these registers differs among Modbus devices. To provide compatibility with the various devices, the double-register format is configurable. The selections are:

FP B Big Endian format Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1 FP L Little Endian format Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4 FP BB Big Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2 FP LB Little Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3

ENABLE SCAN

Use this item to enable or disable scanning of the slave device. Select YES to enable scanning for this device.

Select NO to disable scanning of this device.




Troubleshooting a Comm Quality problem

If a slave device is reporting a Comm Quality value of “BAD”, check the following items:

1. Verify that the slave device is powered-up.

2. Verify that the slave device is wired correctly.

3. Verify that the slave device has the correct slave address.

4. Verify that all slave devices on the link have a unique slave address.

5. Verify that the slave device has the correct baud rate and parity settings.

6. Verify that all slave devices on the link have the same baud rate and parity settings.

7. Verify that the slave is set-up for half-duplex operation.

8. If all slave devices report a BAD status, check the physical connection of the link to the controller’s

RS-232 port. If this connection is OK, check the connection to each slave device on the link.

9. If there is more than one slave device on the link, verify that the RS-232/RS-485 converter box is

working correctly.

10. Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the

terminating resistors is correct.

Troubleshooting Data Link Errors

Data Link Errors can be caused by electrical noise, physical wiring problems, or incorrect configuration

settings. If a Master or Slave device is reporting Data Link Errors, check the following items:

1. Verify that the physical wiring of the communication link is correct.

2. Verify that the physical wiring is shielded from electrical noise.

3. Verify that all devices on the link have the correct baud rate and parity settings.

4. Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the

terminating resistors is correct.

5. If the protocol is “Modbus Master” or “Modbus Master Advanced”, the errors may be due to a slave

device that does not reply when it is scanned.

Unit Setup File Name Selection


File Name Selection

To expedite disk storage using DOS files, a list of file names may be created in advance. The operator

selects from this list when naming profiles, recipes, schedules, sequences, and configurations about to be

stored on the disk.

This display lets you create and modify the list of 25, 6-character file names.

FILENAME1 CONFIG

FILENAME2 PROFILFILENAME3 RECIPE

FILENAME4 STORAGFILENAME5 NAME5

FILENAME6 NAME6FILENAME7 NAME7



FILE NAME SELECTIONS

Figure 58 File name selection

Table 112 File name selection details

Feature Description

FILENAMEn To modify a name, move the cursor to the name and press Enter. Next, use the Increment and Decrement keys to change each character in the six-character name, or use an optionally attached AT-keyboard to type the name directly. Press Enter to keep the new name.

Do not use backslashes\\ or decimal places in file names. Use DOS compatible file names.

Unit Setup Self Tests


Self Tests

This function lets you perform tests to verify proper functioning of the OI.

Press Escape to end any test.

KEYBOARD TEST

DISPLAY TESTDISK READ/WRITE TEST

SELF-TESTS

Figure 59 Self tests

Table 113 Self tests details

Feature Description

KEYBOARD TEST After selecting this, the display goes blank. Press any key to test that key—the key’s name will appear if it is functioning properly. If the key’s name does not appear, the key is faulty. The test can be run using the AT keyboard as well as the local keypad, but only the keys that are mapped to the keypad are exercised. See Table 5. Press Esc to exit this test.

DISPLAY TEST After selecting this, the display shows a spectrum of all possible 16 colors. If these colors are not shown, the display is faulty. Press Enter to cycle through the test displays.

DISK READ/WRITE TEST

This test verifies the operation of the disk drive.

Insert a blank floppy disk or Zip disk into the drive and close the door. Press Enter to begin the test. After a few seconds, the display will indicate whether the test passed or failed. Refer to Messages on page 279 for details about any error messages that may occur.

Unit Setup Calibrate AI


Calibrate AI

ATTENTION

Do not access this menu while the Hybrid Control Designer Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O dialog window is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as both displays are shown; you must exit either display to do a calibration.

Overview

Analog inputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span unless specifically noted in the range

specifications. A field calibration may be performed on any analog input on a point-by-point basis to

optimize measurement accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are retained in non-volatile memory

and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from the calibration procedure.

Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Input module itself. Therefore, once

a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being recalibrated.

However, the controller will automatically restore a channel’s Factory calibration settings under the

following conditions:

• The channel is reconfigured to use a different gain setting. This may happen if you change the input type

of the channel (for example, change from a TC to a Voltage or RTD input type).

• The AI module detects an error in its stored field calibration information. In this case, factory

calibration is restored for all of the channels on the affected module.

Note that you must configure a channel’s input type and range before you try to calibrate it. The

calibration will be performed against the gain setting associated with the input type and range. If you

change the input type after calibrating, the module will automatically restore the Factory calibration

settings for that channel. If necessary, you can use the PC Designer’s Monitor Mode feature to determine

whether a given channel is using Factory or field calibration.

Calibration equipment

• For best results use a calibration source accurate to 1 microvolt.

• You must use a voltage source and copper lead-wire for channels that are configured as thermocouple

and voltage inputs. Do not use a compensated calibrator and TC extension lead-wire to calibrate TC

channels.

• Note that Cold Junction sensor and Analog Input calibrations are performed separately; you do not have

to calibrate the CJ sensors before calibrating your TC input channels.

• If you are calibrating current-type inputs (0-20 ma or 4-20 ma) and you are using an external shunt

resistor, we recommend that you calibrate the channel using a current-source with the actual shunt

resistor installed on the terminals. This will allow you to calibrate out any inaccuracies in the shunt

resistor. A high-precision shunt resistor should always be used.



Calibrate AI menu

Calibrate AI lets you

• change the controller mode from the menu to program or off-line,

• calibrate any analog input channel,

• calibrate cold junction temperature,

• restore a channel’s original factory calibration,

• restore a cold junction’s factory calibration.

Set Controller Mode

When you select “Set Controller Mode” from the menu you can change the Controller’s operating mode. It

has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.

The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.

Select OFF-LINE or PROGRAM to calibrate the AI.

If you press “ENTER “ while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:

THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN

THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,

AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.

PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE

PRESS ESC TO ABORT.

Press ESC to return to “Calibrate AI” menu.



Calibrate AI channel

Calibrate AI Channel guides you through a procedure for calibrating an analog input channel. Perform the

steps in the order of the menu. Refer to the example AI calibration procedure.

Table 114 Calibrate AI channel details

Feature Description

STATUS This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance: READY CONNECT 0% AI CALIBRATING 0% AI CONNECT 100% AI CALIBRATING 100% AI SAVE AI CALIBRATION AI CAL FAILED or DONE

REFERENCE Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module or channel.

TIME REM Time remaining until the selected calibration step is complete.

RACK MODULE CHANNEL

Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the AI to be calibrated.

SELECT INPUT Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.

CALIBRATE 0% INPUT Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

CALIBRATE 100% INPUT

Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the channel calibration.


ATTENTION

Note: Analog Input calibration may fail for the following reasons.

-The physical connection to the calibration source is bad.

-The selected Rack, Module, and Channel does not exist, or does not support AI calibration.

-The selected input does not support the electrical range that you are trying tcalibrate. For example, the 16-channel high-level AI module does not support a range of 0-2 volts.



Example of AI calibration

This example assumes the channel has already been configured as a Type T thermocouple, Range –300 to

700 Degrees F.

Table 115 Example of AI calibration

Step Action

1 Connect the calibrator to the channel to be calibrated. Use a millivolt source and copper wire; do not use TC extension lead-wire.

2 Put the controller into Program or Off-line mode.

3 Access CALIBRATE AI display.

4 Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the input channel to be calibrated.

5 Press Enter to SELECT INPUT. The selected channel will have its 0% range data presented in the upper portion of the calibration display. In this example, the value –5.341 millivolts will be shown.

6 Connect an appropriate input source to the channel to be calibrated and adjust to the 0% value specified in the upper portion of the display.

7 Select CALIBRATE 0% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate the time remaining to recalculate a new 0% calibration value.

8 The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% value (19.097 millivolts in this example). Apply this value to the input.

9 Select CALIBRATE 100% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate the time remaining to recalculate a new 100% calibration value.

10 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the input.

11 Place controller back in Run mode.

ATTENTION

Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start over again.



Calibrate CJ temperature

Each analog input card has two Cold Junction (CJ) sensors that are used in making thermocouple

measurements. These sensors may be re-calibrated in the field if desired to optimize thermocouple

measurement accuracy using the following procedure.

ATTENTION

An inaccurate CJ calibration will affect the accuracy of your thermocouple measurements. If you are going to perform CJ calibration, you must use a very accurate temperature-measuring device. It is also important that you allow the temperature around the controller’s terminal block to stabilize for 10 minutes or more before you take the CJ temperature reading.

Perform the steps in the order shown in the following table.

Table 116 Calibrate CJ temp details

Feature Description

STATUS This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance: READY MEASURE TEMPERATURE AT SELECTED CJ CALIBRATING CJ CJ CAL FAILED SAVE CJ CALIBRATION

REFERENCE Indicates CJ temperature reading in Degrees C. Also indicates an invalid module or channel.

TIME REM Time remaining until calibration is complete.

RACK MODULE CHANNEL

Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the CJ sensor to be calibrated. Channel 1 is the top CJ sensor, Channel 2 is the bottom sensor.

SELECT CJ INPUT Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.

ENTER MEASURED CJ VALUE (IN DEGREES C)

Place your temperature-measuring device at the terminal that is closest to the selected CJ sensor. Allow the environment around the terminal block to stabilize for at least 10 minutes before taking the temperature reading. Enter the measured temperature here, in Degrees C.

CALIBRATE CJ INPUT Select this to start calibration. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the calibration.




Example of CJ calibration

TIP

• Press ESC at any time to abort calibration.

• If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start over again.

• Press ESC as needed to back up to the UNIT SETUP menu and use SET MODE to return the controller to the RUN mode.

• From the CALIBRATE AI display, the factory calibration values may be re-installed and the field calibration values removed on a point-by-point basis by using procedures that conform in principal to those in the table below.

Table 117 Example of CJ calibration

Step Action

1 Put the controller into Program or Offline mode

2 Press Esc to access CALIBRATE CJ TEMP display.

3 Enter RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number (Channel 1 = top sensor, channel 2 = bottom sensor).

4 Press Enter to SELECT CJ INPUT. The current value of the sensor is displayed in degrees centigrade in the top area of the display.

5 Using a separate temperature sensor, measure the temperature of the CJ sensor in degrees Centigrade (Note, CJ calibration is performed in Degrees Centigrade regardless of thermocouple range preferences.).

6 Enter the temperature value measured in step 5 under ENTER MEASURED CJ VALUE (IN DEGREES C)

7 Select CALIBRATE CJ INPUT and press Enter, the area at the top of the display indicated the time remaining to recalculate a new CJ sensor measurement.

8 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the CJ Channel.

9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 for CJ sensor 2.



Restore AI factory calibration

This restores the selected channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of the

menu.

Table 118 Restore AI factory calibration details

Feature Description

STATUS Displays the status of the restore. Possible statuses are: READY RESTORING AI CAL RESTORE AI FAILED

REFERENCE Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid rack, module, or channel.

RACK MODULE CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel to be restored.




Restore CJ factory calibration

This restores the selected cold junction sensor to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the

order of the menu.

Table 119 Restore CJ factory calibration details

Feature Description

STATUS This shows the status of the restore. Possible statuses are: READY RESTORING CJ CAL RESTORE CJ FAILED

REFERENCE Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module or channel.

MODULE Enter the module containing the channel to be restored.

CHANNEL Enter the channel to be restored.

RESTORE Select this to restore calibration.


Unit Setup Calibrate AO


Calibrate AO

ATTENTION

You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O display while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as both displays are shown; user must exit either display to do a calibration.

Overview

Analog outputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span. A field calibration may be performed on any

analog output on a point-by-point basis to optimize accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are

retained in non-volatile memory and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from

the calibration procedure.

Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Output module itself. Therefore,

once a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being

recalibrated.

Calibrate AO menu

For increased accuracy, Calibrate AO lets you

• change the controller mode from this menu to Program mode.

• calibrate any analog output channel

• restore an analog output channel’s original factory calibration

Before calibrating an analog output, you must put the Controller in Program mode. Select “Set Controller

Mode” from the menu and see for instructions.



Set Controller Mode

When you select “Set Controller Mode” from the menu you can change the Controller’s operating mode. It

has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.

The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.

Select PROGRAM in order to calibrate the AO.

If you press “ENTER “ while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:

THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN

THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,

AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.

PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE

PRESS ESC TO ABORT.

Press ESC to return to “Calibrate AO” menu.



Calibrate AO channel

This lets you calibrate any analog output channel. Perform the steps in the order of the menu.

Table 120 Calibrate AO channel details

Feature Description

STATUS This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are: READY CONNECT 0% AO CALIBRATING 0% AO CONNECT 100% AO CALIBRATING 100% AO AO CAL FAILED SAVE AO CALIBRATION

REFERENCE Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module or channel.

RACK MODULE CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be calibrated.

SELECT OUTPUT Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.

ENTER 0% MEASURED VAL.

Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in mA here.

CALIBRATE 0% OUT Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

ENTER 100% MEAS. VALUE

Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in mA here.

CALIBRATE 100% OUT Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the channel calibration.


TIP

• The range of an Analog Output is either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. If you are using an external resistor to convert the current output to a voltage output, you can calibrate the AO channel with the resistor in place. However, you must still enter the 0 and 100 percent calibration values in milliamps; you cannot enter volts or millivolts.

• AO calibration fails when the value entered by the user is outside of the following limits:

− For 4 mA dc, the value entered must be between 3.3 and 4.7 mA dc.

− For 20 mA dc, the value entered must be between 19.3 and 20.7 mA dc.



Example of AO calibration

Table 121 Example of AO calibration

Step Action

1 Press the MENU key, select Unit Setup and Calibrate AO.

2 Place controller in PROGRAM Mode if prompted. (Be aware placing the controller in the Program Mode will cause all controller outputs to turn off, typically turning off the process under control.) Push ESC to return to Calibrate AO.

3 Select Calibrate Channel from available menu selections.

4 Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the output channel to be calibrated.

5 Press Enter to SELECT OUTPUT. The program will then check to see if the selected AO exists. The selected channel will have its 0% reference data presented in the upper portion of the calibration display.

6 Connect an appropriate meter to the output terminals, measure the mA output of the channel being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER 0% MEASURED VAL. in mA.

7 Select CALIBRATE 0% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the 100% entry is now available.

8 The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% reference value. With an appropriate meter measure the output of the channel being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER 100% MEAS. VALUE in mA. .

9 Select CALIBRATE 100% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the new calibration may be saved.

10 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the output channel.

11 If during the procedure either of the tests fail the instrument will display an AO calibration Failed message. This message may occur if the measured/entered data exceeds an appropriate offset range for the input span.

12 Press ESC to return to the Calibrate AO menu and place the controller into the RUN mode. Press ESC until a return to normal displays.

ATTENTION

Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start over again.

You can restore factory calibration settings by following the prompts available under the RESTORE AO

FACTORY CAL menu.



Restore AO factory calibration

This restores the selected AO channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of

the menu.

Table 122 Restore AO factory calibration details

Feature Description

STATUS This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are: READY RESTORING AO CAL RESTORE AO FAILED

REFERENCE Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module or channel.

RACK MODULE CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be restored.

CHANNEL Enter an AO channel to calibrate.

SELECT OUTPUT Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.

Unit Setup Calibrate Motor


Calibrate Motor

ATTENTION

You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller PPO Block display on the PC while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be performed as long as both displays are shown; you must exit either the PC or the OI display to perform a motor calibration.

Introduction

The Calibrate/Setup Motor menu on the Unit Setup display lets you set up and calibrate a selected motor.

SETUP lets you set the motor’s deadband, travel time, low output limit, and high output limit.

CALIBRATE ensures that the 0% and 100% motor positions are actually correct and measures the true

motor speed.

The calibration of a motor is similar to that of an AI or AO. However, the motor calibration values are

stored as part of the PPO block’s configuration data, not on the AI card itself. Therefore, to retain these

motor calibration values, you must upload the configuration and save it to disk after motor calibration has

been performed.

The basic motor calibration procedure is as follows:

• move the motor to its 0% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.

• capture the 0% feedback value.

• move the motor to its 100% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.

• capture the 100% feedback value.

• measure the true motor speed by:

a) moving the motor for a fixed period of time.

b) measuring the position feedback delta.

c) computing a motor speed from this data.

This value will override any previously configured value.

• save the calibration values as part of the PPO block’s configuration data.



Motor Setup

The Motor Setup display lets you set the motor’s Deadband, Travel Time, Low Output Limit, and High

Output Limit.

Table 123 Motor Setup Procedure

Step Action

1 Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR. The “SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE” screen will appear.

2 Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select SETUP from the menu. The “SETUP MOTOR” screen will appear.

3 Select DEADBAND. Deadband is an adjustable gap between forward and reverse motor operation (the range over which the output can change before a relay is energized).

Press the ENTER key.

Enter a value of from 0.5 to 5.0%

4 Select TRAVEL TIME. Travel time is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to its calibrated 100% position.


Enter a value of from 12 to 300 seconds.

5 Select OUTPUT LOW LIMIT. This is the low limit for the motor position.


Enter a value of from 0% to 100%

6 Select OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT. This is the high limit for the motor position.


Enter a value of from 0% to 100%



Motor Calibration

The Calibrate Motor displays let you calibrate a motor ‘s 0% and 100% positions.

Table 124 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure

Step Action

1 Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR. The “SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE” screen will appear.

2 Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select CALIBRATE from the menu. The “CALIBRATE MOTOR” screen will appear.

3 The controller must be in Program Mode in order to perform calibration. If it is not in Program Mode, select “SET CONTROLLER MODE” from the menu. Scroll down to “PROGRAM” then press the ENTER key.

4 Select a calibration method.

There are three methods for calibrating the motor. Scroll to the desired method and press the ENTER key. Follow the appropriate procedure listed under “Calibration Procedures”.

AUTO– the controller positions the motor and captures the positions.

SEMI-AUTO– the controller positions the motor and the user captures the positions.

HAND– the user positions the motor by hand and captures the positions.

Calibration Status Information

This area at the top of the three “CALIBRATE MOTOR” displays shows the following information during

calibration:

STATUS – this field indicates the current status of the calibration procedure.

NOTE: If a status of “Calibration Failed” is displayed, take the appropriate corrective action,

and then repeat the calibration procedure again, beginning at Step 1. See “Calibration Errors”

for more information.

FEEDBACK VALUE – this field shows the motor feedback value [a value between 0.0 and 1.0]. This

value should change whenever the motor is actually moving.

PERCENT COMPLETE – this field indicates the progress of the current calibration step in percent [0 to

100%].

Cancel Calibration

You can stop the calibration process at any time by pressing the F1 key. The motor will stop moving when

this key is pressed. In order to resume calibration you must begin again at Step 1.

Calibration Errors

The following errors may be reported during the calibration process. Please take the appropriate corrective

action and repeat the calibration procedure beginning at Step 1.



Table 125 Calibration Errors

STATUS CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Calibration Failed The calibration was not performed in the correct sequence.

Go back to Step 1 and repeat the calibration process

The selected motor position has not been configured.

Go back to the SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE display and reselect the desired motor.

Calibration Failed – Bad AI The AI channel being used for the position feedback signal has failed in some way.

Check for correct wiring and correct AI input type.

Calibration Failed – Bad Feedback The value of the feedback signal is out of range for the calibration being performed.

Check for reversed wiring of the feedback signal. Forward motor movement should produce increasing feedback values.

Calibration Failed – Wrong AI Version

The firmware on the AI module does not support PPO motor control using a slidewire for the position feedback.

Obtain a new AI module from your supplier.



Auto Calibration Procedure

Table 126 Auto Calibration Procedure

Step Action

1 Select “AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR” from the menu on the “CALIBRATE MOTOR” screen.

Status - READY

2 Select “START AUTO CALIBRATION”

Status – this field will change as the controller automatically performs the various steps of the motor calibration process described in Step 3 below.

Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]

Percent Complete – indicates the progress of each step [0 to 100%]

3 RESULT:

• Status – WAIT…MOTOR MOVING TO 0% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should decrease until the 0% position is reached. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – WAIT…CALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE. Feedback Value – indicates the current position of the motor. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – WAIT…MOTOR MOVING TO 100% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should increase until the 100% position is reached. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – WAIT…CALCULATING 100% FEEDBACK VALUE. Feedback Value – indicates the current position of the motor. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – WAIT…CALCULATING MOTOR SPEED. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0] Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – WAIT…SAVING CALIBRATION VALUES.

Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%].

• Status – CALIBRATION COMPLETED.

4 Press the ESC key to exit this display.

A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.

Press the F2 key to position the motor at 0%


Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.



Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure

ATTENTION

The steps of the Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described below. You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.

If the message “ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER” appears in the Status Area at the top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had completed.

You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration) and beginning again at Step 1.

Table 127 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure

Step Action

1 Select “SEMI-AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR” from the menu on the “CALIBRATE MOTOR” screen.

Status - READY

2 Select “START 0% CALIBRATION”

• Status – WAIT…MOTOR MOVING TO 0% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should decrease until the 0% position is reached. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – MOTOR IS AT 0% POSITION

3 Select “CALIBRATE 0% POSITION”

• Status – WAIT…CALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE. Feedback Value – indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – 0% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED

4 Select “START 100% CALIBRATION”.

• Status – WAIT…MOTOR MOVING TO 100% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should increase until the 100% position is reached. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – MOTOR IS AT 100% POSITION


• Status – WAIT…CALCULATING 100% FEEDBACK VALUE. Feedback Value – indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0] Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]


6 Select “START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION”. A warning display will appear:

WARNING THE MOTOR WILL MOVE AUTOMATICALLY DURING

THE MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION PROCESS PRESS ENTER TO START




Step Action

7 Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.


• Status – MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE

8 Select “SAVE CALIBRATION”. The following information will appear:

FEEDBACK AT 0% - a value corresponding to the motor’s 0% position [0.0 to 1.0] FEEDBACK AT 100% - a value corresponding to the motor’s 100% position [0.0 to 1.0] MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to its calibrated 100% position.

9 Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.

• Status – WAIT…SAVING CALIBRATION VALUES. Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED


A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.



Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.



Hand Calibration Procedure

ATTENTION

The steps of the Hand Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described below. You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.

If the message “ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER” appears in the Status Area at the top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had completed.

You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration) and beginning again at Step 1.

Table 128 Hand Calibration Procedure

Step Action

1 Select “HAND CALIBRATE MOTOR” from the menu on the “CALIBRATE MOTOR” screen.

Status - READY

2 Select “START 0% CALIBRATION”

• Status – PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 0% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the motor is moved in the reverse direction. Percent Complete – will remain at 0% during this step.

Move the motor by hand to the 0% position. When complete, go to step 3.




4 Select “START 100% CALIBRATION”.

• Status – PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 100% POSITION. Feedback Value – indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the motor is moved in the reverse direction. Percent Complete – will remain at 0% during this step.

Move the motor by hand to the 100% position. When complete, go to step 5.




6 Select “START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION”. A warning will appear:

WARNING THE MOTOR WILL MOVE AUTOMATICALLY DURING

THE MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION PROCESS PRESS ENTER TO START




Step Action

7 Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.


• Status – MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE

8 Select “SAVE CALIBRATION”. The following information will appear:

FEEDBACK AT 0% - a value corresponding to the motor’s 0% position [0.0 to 1.0] FEEDBACK AT 100% - a value corresponding to the motor’s 100% position [0.0 to 1.0] MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to its calibrated 100% position.

9 Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.

• Status – WAIT…SAVING CALIBRATION VALUES. Feedback Value – indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0] Percent Complete – indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

• Status – CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED


Unit Setup Display brightness


Display brightness

This display allows you to change the brightness on the display.

Press on the OI to increase the brightness

Press on the OI to decrease the brightness.

CHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

Press to increase brightness

Press to decrease brightness

Press ESC to exit

PROG

Figure 60 Brightness display

Disk Utilities Overview


Disk Utilities

Overview

Access

Main menu.

Description

Disk Utilities lets you load files from the disk to the controller, or store files from the controller to the disk.

Disk insertion

Step Action

1 Open door and insert the disk. While the door is open “BEZEL OPEN” is displayed.

2 Close door. “CHECKING DISK” is displayed while the disk is checked for proper formatting and ready for use. When the message goes away, the disk is ready for use.

Load

Load copies a file from the disk to the controller.

Store

Store copies a file from the controller to the disk.

See also

While performing Disk Utilities, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Disk Utilities List disk files


List disk files

This display lists all files on the disk.

Table 129 List disk files details

Feature Description

FILENAME.EXT File types are identified by the following extensions.

.CDE Configuration

.PRF SP Profile

.SCH SP Schedule

.SEQ Sequence

.RCP Recipe

.DSS Data Storage Set

Anatomy of filenames

This applies only to files created on the OI.

XXXXXX01.CDE

Prefix

6 characters

Suffix

00-99

Extension

Automatically assigned

according to file type

TIP

1. Use Increment and Decrement to see more files.

2. If no files are on the disk, “NO FILES” is displayed.

3. All files on the disk are shown.

Disk Utilities Load/store SP profiles


Load/store SP profiles

This function lets you

• load profiles from the disk to the Controller’s RAM memory, or

• store profiles from the Controller’s RAM memory to the disk.

Description

Once a profile is loaded into the Controller’s memory with Load Profile from Disk, it can be loaded from

memory into a Setpoint Program where it can be run. Therefore, to run a profile that is on the disk, you

must first Load Profile From Disk to memory, then load the profile from memory to the Setpoint

Programmer. To do the latter, see (page 60).

Conversely, to store to disk a program being run by the Setpoint Programmer, you must save the program

from the Setpoint Program to memory, (See Save Program, Page 52) then Store Profile To Disk.

Profiles in RAM

Profile #1

Profile #2

Profile #3 .

.

.

Store Profile To Disk

Load Profile From Disk

Save Program

Load Program

Profile on disk or Zip Program in Setpoint Programmer

LABEL678



PV 1450.0 31.0SP 1449.0 31.1



LOAD

MORE COMMANDS


F1

RUN

F2

HOLD

F3

RESET

F4

ADV

Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer

Select one of the profiles from the Load/Store Profiles display. This is the profile memory location you will

load to or store from.

Next, you will either:

• load a profile from the disk to the selected “slot” in Controller memory, or

• store the profile from this profile location to the disk.

Disk Utilities Load/store SP profiles


Table 130 Load/store profiles details

Feature Description

LOAD PROFILE FROM DISK

Select this to load the selected disk profile to the selected “slot” in Controller memory. Once in memory, the profile can be loaded into a setpoint programmer where it can be run.

After selecting LOAD PROFILE FROM DISK, the following display appears.

BATCH 01 PRF

BATCH 02 PRF

PROFIL01 PRF

PROFIL02 PRF

PROFIL03 PRF

LOAD PROFILE 1 FROM DISK

Select the desired profile to load from disk and press Enter to load it to the selected Controller memory profile location. The message NO FILES means no profiles are on the disk.

STORE PROFILE TO DISK

Select this to store the selected profile from Controller memory to the disk.

After selecting STORE PROFILE TO DISK, the following display appears.

FILE PROFIL01 PRF

FILES ON DISK:

BATCH 01 PRF BATCH 02 PRF

PROFIL01 PRF PROFIL02 PRF

PROFIL03 PRF

STORE PROFILE 1 TO DISK

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the profile being stored. Use Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press Enter to store.

See also

See Load Program (page 60), Save Program (Page 52)

While performing Disk Utilities, messages may appear. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Disk Utilities Load/store SP schedules


Load/store SP schedules


• load schedules from the disk to the Controller’s RAM memory, or

• store schedules from the Controller’s RAM memory to the disk.

Description

Once a schedule is loaded into the Controller’s memory with Load Schedule from Disk, it can be loaded

from memory into the Setpoint Scheduler where it can be run. Therefore, to run a schedule that is on the

disk, you must first Load Schedule From Disk to memory, then load the schedule from memory to the

Setpoint Scheduler. To do the latter, see Load Schedule on Page 81).

Conversely, to store to disk a schedule being run by the Setpoint Scheduler, you must save the schedule

from the Setpoint Schedule to memory, then Store Schedule To Disk. To do the former, see Save schedule

Page 72).

Schedules in RAM

Schedule #1

Schedule #2

Schedule #3 .

.

.

Store Schedule To Disk

Load Schedule From Disk

Save Schedule

Load Schedule

Schedule on disk or Zip Schedule in Scheduler



RUN 3 2 0

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00

SP PV

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGUSP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU

LOADCLEAREDITSAVE

SP SCHEDULER SPTAG1 MAY 0511:30

F1RUN

F2HOLD

F3RESET

F4ADV

Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler

Disk Utilities Load/store SP schedules


Table 131 Load/store schedules details

Feature Description

LOAD SCHEDULE FROM DISK

Select this to load the selected schedule to one of the “slots” in Controller memory. Once in memory, the schedule can be loaded into a configuration.

After selecting LOAD SCHEDULE FROM DISK, the following display appears.

BATCH 01 SCH

BATCH 02 SCH PROFIL01 SCH PROFIL02 SCH

PROFIL03 SCH

LOAD SCHEDULE 1 FROM DISK

Select the desired schedule to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no schedules are on the disk.

STORE SCHEDULE TO DISK

Select this to store the selected schedule from Controller RAM memory to the disk.

After selecting STORE SCHEDULE TO DISK, the following display appears.

FILE UNIT 01 SCH

FILES ON DISK: BATCH 01 SCH

BATCH 02 SCH

PROFIL01 SCH PROFIL02 SCH

PROFIL03 SCH

STORE SCHEDULE 1 TO DISK

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the schedule being stored. Use increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The status of the store is shown on the display.

See also


Disk Utilities Load/Store sequences


Load/Store sequences


• load sequences from the disk to the Controller’s RAM memory, or

• store sequences from the Controller’s RAM memory to the disk.

Once a sequence is loaded into the Controller’s memory with Load Sequence from Disk, it can be loaded

from memory into the Sequencer where it can be run. Therefore, to run a sequence that is on the disk, you

must first Load Sequence From Disk to memory, then load the sequence from memory to the Sequencer.

To do the latter, see Load Sequence (Page 100) in Sequence operation.

Conversely, to store to disk a sequence being rum by the sequencer, you must save the sequence from the

sequence from the Sequencer to memory, then store Sequence to disk. To do the former, see Save Sequence

(page 95 ) in Sequencer Operation.

Sequences in RAM

Sequence #1

Sequence #2

Sequence #3 .

.

.

Store Sequence To Disk

Load Sequence From Disk

Save Sequence

Load Sequence

Sequence on disk or Zip Sequence in Sequencer

STATE HEATING

SEQUENCER


12:30

STEP 1 MODE RUN

STEP STEP SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME TIME REMAINING ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0

AUX OUTPUT - 124.6

SEQUENCE 20 COGS

F1

RUN

F3

RESET

F2

HOLD

F4ADV

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCELOAD SEQUENCE

EDIT STEPSSAVE SEQUENCE

CLEAR SEQUENCE

Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer

Table 132 Load/store sequence details

Feature Description

LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK

Select this to load the selected sequence to one of the “slots” in Controller memory. Once in memory, the sequence can be loaded into a configuration.

After selecting LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK, the following display appears.

BATCH01 SEQ

BATCH02 SEQBATCH03 SEQ

BATCH04 SEQ

BATCH05 SEQ

BATCH06 SEQ

BATCH07 SEQ

BATCH08 SEQBATCH09 SEQ

BATCH10 SEQ

LOAD SEQUENCE1 FROM DISK

Select the desired sequence to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no sequences are on the disk.

Disk Utilities Load/Store sequences


Feature Description

STORE SEQUENCE TO DISK

Select this to store the selected sequence from Controller RAM memory to the disk.

After selecting STORE SEQUENCE TO DISK, the following display appears.

BATCH01 SEQBATCH02 SEQBATCH03 SEQBATCH04 SEQBATCH05 SEQBATCH06 SEQBATCH07 SEQBATCH08 SEQBATCH09 SEQBATCH10 SEQ

STORE SEQUENCE1 TO DISK

FILEFILES ON DISK:

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the sequence being stored. Use increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The status of the store is shown on the display.

See also


Disk Utilities Load/store recipes


Load/store recipes


• load recipes from the disk to the Controller’s RAM memory, or

• store recipes from the Controller’s RAM memory to the disk.

Description

A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe into controller

memory, the recipe becomes available to be loaded into the configuration. By subsequently loading a recipe

from controller memory into a configuration, the values or states of the variables in the recipe replace the

values of those variables in the controller’s configuration.

Select a recipe from the Recipes In Memory display. As explained next in Table 133, you will either

• load a recipe from the disk to the selected recipe location in Controller memory, or

• store the recipe from this recipe location to the disk.

TIP

Do not confuse LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK (into memory) with LOAD RECIPE (into the controller’s configuration). See Load recipe (page 45).

Table 133 Load/store recipes details

Feature Description

LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK

Select this to load the selected recipe to one of the “slots” in Controller memory. Once in memory, the recipe can be loaded into a configuration.

After selecting LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK, the following display appears.

PRDUCT01 RCP

PRDUCT02 RCP

PRDUCT03 RCP

PRDUCT04 RCP

PRDUCT05 RCP

LOAD RECIPE 1 FROM DISK

Select the desired recipe to load from disk and press Enter to load it to Controller memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no recipes are on the disk.

Disk Utilities Load/store recipes


Feature Description

STORE RECIPE TO DISK

Select this to store the selected recipe from Controller RAM memory to the disk.

After selecting STORE RECIPE TO DISK, the following display appears.

FILE PRDUCT 01RCPFILES ON DISK:

PRDUCT01 RCP PRDUCT02 RCP

PRDUCT03 RCP PRDUCT04 RCP

PRDUCT05 RCP

STORE RECIPE 1 TO DISK

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the recipe being stored. Use Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The status of the store is shown on the display.

See also


Disk Utilities Format disk


Format disk

This DOS-formats a floppy disk for storage of recipes, profiles, or configurations. Not available for Zip

disks.

Table 134 Format disk details

Feature Description

FORMAT DISK Select this to format the disk. A warning message will be displayed. Escape to abort the format or press Enter to begin.

All disk data will be erased. The message FORMATTING DISK will appear until formatting is complete, then FORMAT COMPLETE is displayed. Press any key to cancel formatting.

See also


Disk Utilities Set Controller Mode


Set Controller Mode

This lets you change the Controller’s operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of

the display.

Table 135 Set mode details

Feature Description

CONTROLLER MODE Current mode of the controller. See Table 93.

SET CONTROLLER MODE

RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.

PROGRAM: Select this:

• Before performing AI and AO Calibration.

• To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.

Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the Program mode for changes whenever possible.

Table 136 Controller modes defined

Mode Function Blocks Executed? Output Status? Effect upon return to RUN mode?

RUN Yes Outputs updated None

OFFLINE No Outputs held Resume

PROGRAM No Outputs off Cold start

ATTENTION

You cannot change the controller mode from this display if the controller’s mode switch is in the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked positions, this display will show the message “MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.”

TIP

• If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here, following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.

• Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules, sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.

• In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.

• In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left off.

Disk Utilities Set Controller Mode



Data Storage

Overview

Data Storage lets you store data from the controller on a floppy disk (Models 559 and 1042) or ZIP disk

(model 1042 only). Trends, a point log, alarms, and events are collected in separate files on a disk for later

analysis and review on a PC with SDA data analysis software.

Data storage overall process

Controller

Operator Interface (Model 1042 example)

Step 1: Configure data storage Configure Data Storage Sets (.DSS) using Hybrid Control Designer.

Step 2: Transfer configuration from PC to Controller Transfer Data Storage Sets to Controller by one of the following methods: 1. Download configuration (which includes .DSS) from Hybrid Control Designer to Controller. 2. a) Save .DSS file to floppy disk b) Insert .DSS disk in Operator Interface c) Load Data Storage Settings from .DSS disk to the Controller.

Step 3: Initialize and begin storage 1. Pre-initialize optional ZIP disk on a PC with Hybrid Control Designer. 2. Initialize Zip disk or floppy disk in the OI. 3. Process data (trends, point log, alarms, events) is stored to floppy disk according to Storage Control settings.

Step 4: Analyze stored data 1. Remove floppy disk with stored process data. 2. View stored data on PC with Software Data Analysis (SDA) software.

Step 5 (optional): Transfer configuration to another Controller To transfer Data Storage Settings from one Controller to another: 1. Store .DSS settings to OI floppy disk. 2. Insert this floppy disk into second Controller’s OI. 3. Load Data Storage Settings to the second Controller.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Honeywell

F4

AL ARM ?

ESC

F3 F2 F1

•••• 0 1 4 7

2 5 8

3 6 9 _

PC with: 1. Hybrid Control Designer 2. SDA for analyzing stored data

Note that configuration and analysis are done on a PC and operation is done through the OI.

What can be stored

You can store the following data types:

• 2 trend groups of up to 12 points each.

• Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) alarm state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes

of all points in all alarm groups are stored.

• Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) event state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes of

all points designated as events are stored. An event is any digital signal added to the event group. These

can include setpoint profile events and setpoint schedule events as well as any other digital signals added

to the event group.

• A Point Log of up to 2000-5000 records (maximum is user configurable) where each record contains

sampled values or states of up to 12 points.

Data Storage Overview


What can not be stored

Setpoint Programs, instrument configurations, recipes, variables, diagnostics, and calibrations are not part

of the Data Storage feature.

Storage capacity [floppy and Zip(1042 only)]

When you are trying to calculate the trend file storage capacity, you must also consider the Point Log file.

The Point Log should be set up so that it will last as long as the trend files; otherwise it may cause a Disk

Full condition long before the trend files are full. Use the following formula to determine the duration of

the Point Log file.

Duration = Record Count x Storage Rate

For example, if the Point Log is configured to hold 2000 records and the storage rate is 1 minute, the Point

Log will become full in 2000 minutes (33 hours).

If the duration of the Point Log does not match the duration of the trend files, adjust the record count and/or

storage of the Point Log as needed.

Storage capacity (floppy disk)

Floppy disk storage capacities for all data types except trends are shown above. Capacity for trends is

inversely proportional to the number of trend points and the storage time interval (that is, the time between

trend samples). That is, the shorter the storage interval and the more points being stored, the sooner the disk

will reach capacity. For example, when storing 2 trend groups of 12 points each at a storage interval of 2

seconds, the floppy disk will be filled in a few hours. Conversely, when storing 1 trend group of 3 points at

a storage interval of 30 minutes, the floppy disk could take several months to be filled.

Calculating storage capacity (floppy disk)

Use the following formula to calculate the disk capacity in hours:

)2/1(*2(1

1*)(

RRFF

RFactorDiskhoursCapacityDisk

+=

where

Disk Factor is based on which data types are stored:

398: Trend storage only

394: Trends, Alarms & Events

347: Trends, Alarms & Events, Point Log

R1 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 1

R2 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 2

F1= point factor for Trend 1. See Table 137.

F2= point factor for Trend 2. See Table 137.

Table 137 Data storage point factors

For this number of points in a trend:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Use this Point Factor:

0 14.00 20.16 26.53 33.60 38.77 45.82 50.40 56.00 63.00 72.00 84.00 84.00



Example storage capacity calculation (floppy disk)

Trend 1 = 6 points, rate 30 seconds

Trend 2 = none

Point Log = OFF

Alarms and Events = ON

Calculation:

Disk factor = 394

Point Factor (Trend 1) = 45.82

Point Factor (Trend 2) = 33.60

Disk capacity (hours) = = 258 hours394 * 30

45.82 + (0 * (30/0))

Zip drives (On Model 1042 only)

Preinitialize Zip disks on a PC using DSU

If the OI has the optional Zip drive installed, we strongly recommend that you pre-initialize the Zip disks

on a PC using the Data Storage Utility (DSU) - See Table 138. This program is part of the Hybrid Control

Designer package. If you do not pre-initialize your data storage Zip disks using DSU, the initialization

process on the OI may take several hours.

Note that DSU cannot be used for floppy disks.

Capacity of a Zip disk

The following formula can be used to compute the capacity of any trend file on a Zip disk:

6560 * RCapacity (in hours) =

F

where:

R is the storage rate of the trend, in seconds.

F is the point factor for the trend. See Table 88.

Note that each trend file on a Zip disk is 24MB, so the capacity of each trend file is independent of any other data storage files on the disk.

Estimated Zip drive capacity

Sample Rates Estimated Zip Drive Capacity Per Trend File

Number of Trends

Total Number of Points

2 Sec. 10 Sec. 30 Sec. 2 Min. 5 Min.

1 or 2 6 11.9 days 59.5 days 178 days 714 days 1785 days

12 6.5 days 32.5 days 97 days 388 days 970 days

Note: On a Zip drive each trend is allocated 24 megabytes



Table 138 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only

Step Action

1 Insert the 100MB/Zip disk into your PC drive.

2 Start the Hybrid Control Designer Program under Windows

3 Select the Utilities tab, then select Data Storage Utility. The dialog box appears.

4 Click on Drive Letter to specify the drive on your PC (A, B, etc.).

5 Click on Trend Groups to specify the number of Trend Groups that the OI will need (1 or 2)

6 Click on Pre-Initialize to prepare the disk for storage. Each trend group takes about four minutes.

7 Exit DSU.

8 Remove disk, insert it into the OI, and initialize it. See Initializing Disk under this section entitled "Data Storage Operation".

Rollover

If a data type is configured for rollover storage, the space allocated for it will fill up then the oldest data will be replaced with new incoming data (as a circular buffer). For example, if alarm storage is set to

rollover and the alarm file is set up to store 1500 alarms, 1500 alarms will be stored. The 1501st alarm will

replace the oldest alarm, the 1502nd

alarm will replace the next oldest alarm, and so on.



Storage modes

Trends, Point Logs, and Alarms/Events can be stored in Continuous or Batch modes. In addition, Point Logs can be stored in On Command mode. See Table 139.

Table 139 Storage modes

Mode Description

Continuous Data is sampled at the storage interval.

Batch Data is sampled at the storage interval, but also a Batch Enable Signal separates the sampled data into numbered batches. Batch #1 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends when the signal turns off. Batch #2 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends when the signal turns off, etc. No batch mode data is collected while the Batch Enable Signal is off. The Batch Enable Signal does not affect data being stored as Continuous or On Command.

On Command Point Log mode only. Point Log data is sampled once when the Point Log storage is enabled, but not after each storage interval. That is, a “snapshot” of Point Log data is stored once. This snapshot is triggered by the off-to-on transition of the Enable Signal for Point Log.

Off No data is being stored.

Storage intervals

When data storage is enabled, samples are taken at regular intervals known as the storage intervals. These

intervals can be from a few seconds to 30 minutes for trends, or more for Point Log. Each data type has its

own storage interval.

In Continuous and Batch modes, the storage interval determines how often data is sampled and stored. In

these modes for trends and alarms/events, data is first sampled when storage is enabled and again at equally

spaced intervals thereafter. For example, if trend storage is enabled at 2:03 p.m. and the interval is 10

minutes, trend storage occurs at 2:03, 2:13, 2:23, etc. until storage is disabled.

In Continuous and Batch modes for Point Log, data is first sampled after storage is enabled but not until the

programmed Start Time. Data is sampled at equally spaced intervals after the Start Time. For example,

suppose the Start Time is 3:00 p.m. and the storage interval is 10 minutes. If storage is enabled at 2:03

p.m., the first sample will occur at 3:00 and every 10 minutes thereafter. If storage is disabled at 3:35 and

enabled at 3:42, storage will resume at 3:50. Notice that the interval is synchronized to the Start Time.

The storage interval for Point Log can also be once a day or once a month, synchronized to the Start Time.

In On Command mode for Point Log, there is no storage interval or Start Time. A single sample of Point

Log data is taken when the Point Log Enable changes from off (disable) to on (enable).



How storage is controlled

Depending on the data type being stored, there are two or three levels of control for data storage. For storage of a data type to occur, all levels of control must be enabled. If any level is disabled, that data type

will not be stored. Figure 64 shows the controls that must be enabled for each storage mode and data type.

The left side shows the three data types and their possible storage modes (only one storage mode is in effect

for any data type). For example, trend storage is either batch or continuous, not both. The arrows show the

conditions required for that storage to take place. For example, trend batch storage requires three controls

to be enabled: 1) the Trend Storage Control, 2) the Batch Command Control, and 3) the Data Storage

Control. Notice that the Batch Command Control applies only to those data types in batch storage mode.

Also notice Data Storage Control enables all storage; if it is disabled no storage will occur.

TrendsStorage Mode = Batch

TrendsStorage Mode = Continuous

Point LogStorage Mode = Batch

Point LogStorage Mode = Continuous

Alarms/EventsStorage Mode = Batch

Alarms/EventsStorage Mode = Continuous

Point LogStorage Mode = On Command

Batch Command = Enable

(with digital signal or Storage Control menu)

Data Storage = Enable (with Storage Control menu)

S

T

O

R

A

G

E

I

N

E

F

F

E

C

T

Trend Storage = Enable(with digital signal or

Storage Control menu)

Point Log Storage = Enable


Alarms/Events Storage = Enable


Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage



Three levels of control

Data storage enabler

The highest level of control is the Data Storage control item found on the Storage Control menu under Data Storage (first line in Figure 65). It disables data storage for all trends, alarms, events, and point log. It must

be enabled for any storage to occur.

STORAGE CONTROLS

DATA STORAGE ENABLE

BATCH COMMAND START

TRENDS ENABLE

POINT LOG ENABLE

ALARMS/EVENTS ENABLE

Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown

Data type enabler

The second level of control is the Data Type Enabler. Each data type (trends, point log, and alarms/events)

has its own Enabler that turns storage on and off for that data type. Each of these Enablers can either appear

on the Storage Control menu (third, fourth, and fifth lines in Figure 65) or can be programmed as a digital

signal. For example, if the Trend Enabler is programmed as a digital signal, it will not appear on the

Storage Control menu. In this case, trend storage is enabled when the digital signal turns on and is disabled when the signal turns off.

The Point Log Enabler functions differently depending on the storage mode. In Continuous and Batch

modes, it enables Point Log storage to begin at the Start Time and at every storage interval thereafter. In On

Command mode, when it changes from off (disable) to on (enable), it causes a single sample of Point Log data to be stored at that moment (Figure 68).

Batch enabler

The third level of control is the Batch Enabler. It starts and stops storage for all data types configured for

Batch storage; it does not affect Continuous or On Command storage. It appears either on the Data Storage Control menu—as Batch Command (second line of Figure 65)—or it is programmed as a digital signal.



Example of trend enabling

In Figure 66, notice that no continuous trend storage occurs unless Trend Enable and Data Storage Enable are both on (enabled). For batch trend storage, notice that all three enables must be on.

Batch

Command

Trend

Enable

Data Storage

Enable

Trend

Continuous

Trend

Batch

Time

If enabledlike this:

Then storedlike this:

Key:

Enabled DisabledDisabled

Batch #1 Batch #2 Batch #3

Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions

Example of alarm/event enabling

As with Trends, no continuous alarm/event storage occurs unless Alarm/Event Enable and Data Storage Enable are both on (enabled). For batch alarm/event storage, all three enables must be on.

Batch

Command

Alarm/Event

Enable

Data Storage

Enable

Alarm/Event

Continuous

Alarm/Event

Batch

Time



Key:



Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions



Example of point log enabling

In Figure 68, notice that no continuous Point Log storage occurs unless Point Log Enable and Data Storage Enable are both on (enabled). For batch Point Log storage, notice that all three enables must be on. Notice

that storage does not actually occur until the Start Time occurs, and then at every Storage Interval

thereafter.

For On Command storage, notice the samples are taken the instant Point Log Enable is enabled but not at intervals.

Batch

Command

Point Log

Enable

Data Storage

Enable

Point Log

Continuous

Point Log

Batch

Point Log

On Command

Start

Time



TimeKey:


Storage starts

here

Start Time = 1:15 p.m.

Storage Interval = 30 minutes

12:00 12:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 7:00

Storage starts

here

Single samples


Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions

How to analyze stored data

With the stored data on a floppy or Zip disk, use SDA on a PC to review the data graphically or in tabular form. Refer to SDA documentation for details.

Data Storage Data Storage Operation


Data Storage Operation

Access

→

RECIPESVARIABLES

SP PROGRAMMERSLOOPSALARMS/DIAGS

UNIT SETUPDISK UTILITIESDATA STORAGE

MAIN MENU MAY06

11:30

→

DATA STORAGE

VIEW STORAGE STATUS

STORAGE CONTROLS

INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK

LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS

VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS

START NEW STORAGE SETTINGS

STORE STORAGE SETTINGS

Typical data storage tasks

Task Page

Viewing storage status. 231

Controlling storage (3 methods):

• Start/stop all storage with DATA STORAGE item on Storage Control menu.

• Start/stop a particular storage file’s storage (2 ways):

with its external enable discrete, or

with its enabler on the Storage Control menu.

• Start/stop all storage batches with Batch menu item or with BATCH CONTROL discrete.

233

Initializing a new disk. 234

Loading storage settings from disk to controller. 235

Viewing current storage settings. 236

Starting new storage settings. 237

Storing storage settings from controller to disk. 238

Viewing Status Line storage indicator. 238

Analyzing data stored on disk. See SDA manual (Part #51-52-25-51).



View storage status

This function shows the remaining disk capacities for each data type along with other storage statuses.

TIP

This display can be configured for access under any Display Group key.

DATA STORAGE STATUS

REMAININGTREND 1 02 10 15 YTREND 2 01 05 20 Y

POINT LOG ROLL NALARM SAMPLES 100 YEVENT SAMPLES 95 Y

WARNING LEVEL % 90BATCH NUMBER 0 OFF

SYSTEM: NORMALDISK: NORMALENABLE STORAGE ENABLED

JAN3111:30

Figure 69 View storage status

Table 140 View storage status details

Feature Description

Y Indicates that storage is enabled for this data type. See Storage controls (page 233). See External Enable (Table 142).

N Indicates that storage is disabled for this data type. See Storage controls (page 233). See External Enable (Table 142).

TREND 1 XX XX XX

Or

TREND 1 ROLL

Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 1 data

Or

Trend 1 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

TREND 2 XX XX XX

Or

TREND 2 ROLL

Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 2 data

Or

Trend 2 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

POINT LOG XXX

Or

POINT LOG ROLL

Number of point log samples remaining on disk

Or

Point Log is in Rollover, which means when the point log space is full on the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.



Feature Description

ALARM SAMPLES XXX

Or

ALARM SAMPLES ROLL

Number of alarms remaining on disk

Or

Alarm storage is in Rollover, which means when the alarm space is full on the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

EVENT SAMPLES XXX

Or

EVENT SAMPLES ROLL

Number of events remaining on disk

Or

Event storage is in Rollover, which means when the event space is full on the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

WARNING LEVEL % When any data type (trend, point log, or alarms/events) reaches this % of its disk capacity, a disk warning message is displayed.

BATCH NUMBER Current batch number of all data batches. Zero (0) indicates batch storage has not started.

Current batch status (ON/OFF) indicates whether batch storage is active.

SYSTEM: Indicates status of data storage system

DISK: Indicates status of disk

ENABLE STORAGE Indicates whether all data storage is enabled or disabled. DISABLED means no storage is occurring, regardless of Y/N status above. See Storage controls (page 233).



Storage controls

This screen lets you enable and disable part or all of data storage.

STORAGE CONTROLS

DATA STORAGE ENABLEBATCH COMMAND STARTTRENDS ENABLEPOINT LOG ENABLEALARMS/EVENTS ENABLE

Figure 70 Storage controls

Table 141 Storage controls details

Feature Description

DATA STORAGE ENABLE: Select this to enable all of data storage. Must be selected for any storage to occur.

DISABLE: Select this to disable all of data storage. If disabled, no storage will occur.

BATCH COMMAND* START: Select this to start batch storage.

STOP: Select this to stop batch storage.

This affects only batch data; it does not affect continuous or on-command data. Batch data collected between a start and the following stop is assigned a batch number. With each selection of START, the batch number increments by 1.

TRENDS* ENABLE: Select this to enable trend storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable trend storage. If disabled, no trend storage will occur.

POINT LOG* ENABLE: Select this to enable Point Log storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable Point Log storage. If disabled, no Point Log storage will occur.

ALARMS/EVENTS* ENABLE: Select this to enable Alarm/Event storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable Alarm/Event storage. If disabled, no Alarm/Event storage will occur.

* Does not appear if programmed as an external enable.



Initialize storage disk

Formats the disk for data storage. Use this to continue the current storage settings onto a new disk.

After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename

extensions.

(Do Not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name – Use DOS compatible file names)

.LNT = Trend

.LNP = Point Log

.LNA = Alarms

.LNE = Events

DATA STORAGE

VIEW STORAGE STATUS

VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS

STORAGE CONTROLS

INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK



WARNING

INITIALIZATION WILL

ERASE ALL EXISTING

DISK FILES AND DATA

PRESS ENTER TO INIT

PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Figure 71 Initialize storage disk

Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.



Load storage settings

Select this to load data storage settings from the disk to the controller. Data Storage Setting files have

extension .DSS. Use this function to:

• load data storage settings that were stored to disk from another controller.

FILE 01 DSS

FILE 02 DSS FILE 03 DSS


Figure 72 Load storage settings

Move cursor to desired file and press Enter. A message then warns you that the load will overwrite the

existing storage settings. To complete the load, press Enter, or to abort it press Escape.

TIP

To begin storage using the loaded settings, select Start New Storage Settings. See Start new storage settings (page 237).



View storage settings

This lets you view (not change) the settings—as configured in the Hybrid Control Designer—of trends, point log, and alarms/events. All these settings comprise the .DSS file, which can be loaded from the disk

to the controller, or stored from the controller to the disk.

Select a data type and press Enter to see the settings for that data type.


DATA STORAGE SETTINGS

TREND 1 STORAGE

TREND 2 STORAGE

POINT LOG STORAGE

ALARM/EVENT STORAGE

BATCH INPUTSTARTUP

→ ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT RUNS H Z

TREND 1 STORAGE

STORAGE MODE CONTINUOUS

EXTERNAL ENABLE TAGNAME1

ROLLOVER ON

FILE NAME TREND01.LNT

STORAGE INTERVAL 10 SECS

POINT 1 TAGNAME1

POINT 2 TAGNAME2

POINT 3 TAGNAME3

POINT 4 TAGNAME4

POINT 5 TAGNAME5

POINT 6 TAGNAME6

POINT 7 TAGNAME7

POINT 8 TAGNAME8

POINT 9 TAGNAME9

POINT 10 TAGNAM10

POINT 11 TAGNAM11

POINT 12 TAGNAM12

Figure 73 View storage settings

Table 142 View storage setting details

Feature Description

STORAGE MODE CONTINUOUS: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval.

BATCH: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval and is separated into numbered batches.

ON COMMAND: Point Log data is sampled once only, when the External Enable switches from off to on or when you change Point Log from Disable to Enable on the Storage Control menu.

EXTERNAL ENABLE Name of digital signal that is controlling the storage for the selected data type. When this digital signal is on, the data type’s storage is enabled; when off, disabled.

If NONE, then storage for this data type is controlled through that data type’s enabler on the Storage Control menu (Figure 70).

ROLLOVER When rollover is ON, the data type’s storage will never fill up the disk but will continually replace existing disk data with new incoming data. When rollover is OFF, the disk will eventually fill up with data and will not accept more incoming data unless a new disk is inserted.

FILE NAME 8 character file name of data being stored to disk. This name is used to identify the file you want to replace on a PC. The filename extension indicates the type of data in the file: (Do not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name)

.LNT = Trend

.LNP = Point Log

.LNA = Alarms

.LNE = Events

STORAGE INTERVAL

How often data is sampled in continuous or batch modes. Point Log On Command does not use a storage interval.



Feature Description

START TIME / INTERVAL

For Point Log, select this to view the Start Time and Storage Interval.

POINT 1 …

POINT 12

For all storage except Alarms/Events, up to 12 Points being stored.

RECORD COUNT The maximum number of records in a Point Log file.

ALARM RECORD COUNT

The maximum number of records in an Alarm file.

EVENT RECORD COUNT

The maximum number of records in an Event file.

Start new storage settings

Formats the disk for data storage using the new storage settings. Use this after loading storage settings.

After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename

extensions.

.LNT = Trend

.LNP = Point Log

.LNA = Alarms

.LNE = Events

DATA STORAGE

VIEW STORAGE STATUSSTORAGE CONTROLSINITIALIZE STORAGE DISKLOAD STORAGE SETTINGS


WARNING

START NEW STORAGE SETTINGSINITIALIZATION WILLERASE ALL EXISTINGDISK FILES AND DATAPRESS ENTER TO INITPRESS ESC TO ABORT

Figure 74 Start new storage settings

Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.



Store storage settings

This lets you store the controller’s storage settings to disk. You can view the current settings under View

storage settings (Figure 73).

You can store different settings to disk, then load them when needed.

FILE FILE 01 DSS

FILES ON DISK: FILE01 DSS

FILE02 DSS

FILE03 DSS RECORD01 DSS

RECORD02 DSS


Figure 75 Store storage settings

Use the Increment and Decrement keys to select a filename and number for the settings. A .DSS extension

will automatically be added to the filename. Press Enter to proceed with the load.

Status line storage indicator

A storage indicator (“S”) appears on the status line at the bottom of the display when data storage is active.

When the indicator is not visible, the user can determine why storage is inactive by accessing the Storage

Status display (Figure 69) or the Storage Controls display (Figure 70).


Log Off/Log On

Access

Main menu.

Description

Access the Log Off display to

• deter unwanted users from interacting with the instrument. If Log Off security is enabled the operator

must enter a security code to log on. See Set Security/Review Security (page 163).

• learn the part number and firmware revision number of the OI.

Table 143 Log off display details

Feature Description

PRESS ENTER TO LOG ON

Press Enter to return to the process. If security is not enabled, you are returned to the Display Group 1 key’s first display. If security is enabled, you are prompted to enter the security code before gaining access to the display.

PART # OI firmware part number.

REV. # OI firmware revision number.

SUPPORTING TEXT Custom text from the Startup Display (page 19).

Log Off/Log On Data Storage Operation



Other Operating Displays

Overview

The following operating displays are also configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.

Pushbuttons: See page

Pushbutton Displays 242

4-Selector Switch Display 243

Device Control Display 244

Hand/Off/Auto Switch Display 246

Other:

Stage Operate Display 247

Ramp Operate Display 249

Alternator Operate Display 252

Calendar Event Operate Display 256

They are accessed by pressing the keys below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to scroll through up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have all these

displays configured.

Other Operating Displays Pushbuttons


Pushbuttons

Pushbutton display has four functions. To perform the function description, press the corresponding F1-F4

key located immediately to the right of the display. For example, press F1 to perform the topmost function.

Description

• Accessed through any Display Group key (as configured).

• Use F1 – F4 keys to issue discrete control.

• Shows feedback of an associated discrete state or an analog value.

• Shows text description of the action performed.


PUSHBUTTONS

F1FUNCTION DESCRIPTAG45678

STATE1


12345.6


1234.56


STATE2

Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys

Table 144 Pushbutton details

Feature Description

Tag Name of the discrete or analog signal.

State/Value State of the signal (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.) or current value.

Function Description of the function. To perform the function, press the corresponding F1-F4 key located immediately to the right of the display.

Other Operating Displays 4-Selector Switch


4-Selector Switch

This display has four functions accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. Once a

function is selected, you can select one of four possible states for that function. That is, the function acts as

a 4-position rotary switch, with one and only one state in effect at any time.


4 POSITION SWITCHES

F1FUNCTION DESCRIP1 STATE1




Figure 77 Four selector switch display

Table 145 Four selector switch details

Feature Description

FUNCTION DESCRP1 Name of the function accessed by F1 key.

STATE1 Current state of F1 function.







To select a function, press the key corresponding to that function. A popup menu appears. See Figure 78.

This popup menu shows the four selectable states for the function you chose. Only one state at a time is

allowed.


4 POSITION SWITCHES





FUNCTION DESCR

STATE ASTATE B

STATE CSTATE D

USE ARROW KEYS TO SELECT

PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE

PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu

Other Operating Displays Device Control


Device Control

This display has four device controls accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. There

are four device controls per display, for a total of four displays. The order of the device controls can be

changed with the Hybrid Control Designer.

When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened.


DEVICE CONTROL

F1DEVTAG1 READY 99999 SECS

F1DEVTAG2 PRESTART 99999 SECS

F1DEVTAG3 STARTING 99999 SECS

F1DEVTAG4 RUNNING 99999 SECS

Figure 79 Device control display

Table 146 Device control display details

Feature Description

DEVTAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration.

STATE READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING, DISABLED, or FAILED.

99999 SECS Current Timer value. READ ONLY – Counts down to zero.

• The Start Delay Timer is active in the Prestart state

• The Stop Delay Timer is active in the Stopping state

• The Feedback timer is active in the Starting state while the Feedback input pin is OFF.

• The Feedback timer is active in the Running state (if the Feedback input turned on in the starting state.)

Other Operating Displays Device Control


Change the current delay times

When you press the F# key on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened. You can change the current delay times for START, STOP, and FEEDBACK FAIL Timers.


EDIT DEVICE

DEVTAG1

START DELAY TIME(SECS) 99999

STOP DELAY TIME (SECS) 99999

FEEDBACK FAIL TIME (SECS) 99999

RESET FAILURE

READY

Figure 80 Edit device display

Table 147 Edit device display details

Feature Description

DEVTAG1 Tag name defined during block configuration – READ ONLY.

READY Current state of device – Located in the lower right corner of the title area of the display. READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING, DISABLED, or FAIL.

START DELAY TIME Current start delay time in seconds

STOP DELAY TIME Current stop delay time in seconds

FEEDBACK FAIL TIME Current feedback fail delay time in seconds

RESET FAILURE The device may only be reset if it is currently in the failure state, the ERR (failure) input pin on the function block is OFF, and the Automatic Reset parameter (configured on the Hybrid Control Designer) is OFF. Otherwise a warning dialog is displayed explaining the reason why the Device Reset Request failed. Reasons for ignoring reset request: a. Failure Input pin is ON. b. Automatic Reset is enabled. c. Device is not in Failure state.

TIP

If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the Device Control Operator display.

Other Operating Displays Hand/Off/Auto Switch


Hand/Off/Auto Switch

This display has four HOA switches accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. The

order of the HOA switches can be changed using the Hybrid Control Designer.

When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is

opened.


HAND/OFF AUTO SWITCHES

F1HOATAG1

AUTOTAG00001STATE1

F2HOATAG2

BYPASSTAG00002STATE4

F3HOATAG3

HANDTAG00003

STATE2

F4HOATAG4

OFFTAG00004

STATE7

Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display

Table 148 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details

Feature Description

TAGxxxxx Eight-character tag name of the feedback signal providing the analog value for the State enumeration.

STATE# Eight-character State enumeration – defined during block configuration.

HOATAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration – READ ONLY.

STATE OF SWITCH HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS

Set the HOA switch state

When you press an F# key on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is opened. If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the HOA Switch Operator display.

Table 149 Set HOA switch state display details

Feature Description

HOATAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration.

CURRENT STATE HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS (see note)

CHANGE SOURCE LOCAL, REMOTE, LOCAL/REMOTE

SET STATE Select OFF, AUTO, or HAND (see note)

Note: If the current state is BYPASS, any requests to change the state are ignored.

Other Operating Displays Stage


Stage

This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Stages grouped together in the Stage

function block and edit the following parameters for each Stage:

• ON DELAY TIME

• OFF DELAY TIME

• SP_ON

• SP_OFF

• INTERLOCK_PREV

• INTERLOCK_NEXT

PV1PV2

45.00400.000

STAGEOP1 12:30

EDIT STAGE

EU1EU2

STAGENM1

STAGENM2

STAGENM3

STAGENM4

1

1,2

1,2

1

NEXT

BOTH

PREV

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

OFF

PV INTLK OVRD REQ

Figure 82 Stage operator display

Table 150 Stage operator display details

Feature Description

STAGEOP1 Block tag name configured during block configuration – READ ONLY

PV1 PV1 input pin of the function block (pressure)

PV2 PV2 input pin of the function block (flow)

EU1 Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration

EU2 Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration

STAGENM# Stage label configured during block configuration – READ ONLY

PV 1 = Both PVs are PV1 2 = Both PVs are PV2 1,2 = PV ON = PV1 and PV OFF = PV2 2,1 = PV ON = PV2 and PV OFF = PV1

INTLK NONE = No Interlocking NEXT = Interlocked with next stage PREV = Interlocked with previous stage BOTH = Interlocked with next and previous stage ERROR = The configured interlock is incorrect

OVRD NONE, ON, and OFF – Override On [4] input pins and Override Off [4] input pins of the function block

REQ l Request is ON � Request is OFF ' Request is OFF and Stage is DISABLED

EDIT STAGE n When you select EDIT STAGE, an Engineering Security pop-up is displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control Designer configuration. After the security code is entered the Edit Stage display will appear.

Other Operating Displays Stage


Edit stage display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Stage number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the Stage Operator display.

Table 151 Edit stage display details

Feature Description

EU1, EU2 Engineering units for PV1 or PV2 display – four characters

EDIT STAGE # Stage selected on Edit Stage sub-menu

ON DELAY TIME Delay prior to latching the output ON Range: 0-9999 seconds

OFF DELAY TIME Delay prior to latching the output OFF Range: 0-9999 seconds

SP_ON* Setpoint used with ON comparator – No range limit

SP_OFF* Setpoint used with OFF comparator – No range limit

INTERLOCK_PREV Interlock with previous stage Select NO or YES

INTERLOCK_NEXT Interlock with next stage Select NO or YES


*The number of decimal places and the engineering units for SP_ON and SP_OFF must match the associated PV

parameter’s decimal places and engineering units.

Other Operating Displays Ramp


Ramp

This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Ramps grouped together in the Ramp

function block and edit the following parameters for each Ramp:

• LAG TIME

• TRANSFER RATES

• OUTPUT SCALE HIGH

• OUTPUT SCALE LOW

• INPUT HIGH LIMIT

• INPUT LOW LIMIT

STATUSINPUTOUTPUT

45.00400.000

RAMPOPD1 12:30

EDIT RAMP

ENABLEDEU1EU2

RAMPLBL1

RAMPLBL2RAMPLBL3

RAMPLBL4

1

23

4

YES

YESYES

NO

OFF

HIGHHIGH

OFF

ENABLED OVERRIDE

Figure 83 Ramp operator display

Table 152 Ramp operator display details

Feature Description

RAMPOPD1 Block tag name

STATUS ENABLED or DISABLED (DIS) input pin of function block

INPUT PV input pin of function block

OUTPUT Output pin of function block

EU1 Engineering units of the PV defined during block

EU2 Engineering units of the Output defined during block configuration

RAMPLBL# Label defined during configuration

ENABLED Enable (YES) or Disable (NO) [4] input pins of function block.

OVERRIDE OFF, LOW, or HIGH – Override [4] input pins

EDIT RAMP When you select EDIT RAMP, an Engineering Security pop-up is displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control Designer configuration. After the security code is entered, an Edit Ramp sub-menu is opened.




Edit ramp display

This display opens when you select the EDIT RAMP on the Ramp Operator display. You can select a Ramp to edit and also change parameters (LAG TIME, TRANSFER RATE UP, TRANSFER RATE

DOWN).

Select ESC to return to Ramp Operator display.

Table 153 Edit ramp sub-menu display details

Feature Description

EDIT RAMP # Select EDIT RAMP # to open the Edit Ramp display.

TRNSFR RATE UP (EU) Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a higher value (bumpless analog transfer) Range: 0-99999 EU/second

TRNSFR RATE DN (EU) Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a lower value (bumpless analog transfer) Range: 0-99999 EU/second

LAG TIME (SEC) Lag Time constant on PV signal Range: 0.0 seconds to 120.0 seconds 0 = NO LAG



Edit ramp display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Ramp number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the Ramp Operator display.

Table 154 Edit ramp display details

Feature Description

EDIT RAMP # Ramp selected on Edit Ramp sub-menu – READ ONLY

OUT SCALE HIGH* High output limit after rescale Range: Full scale +/–

OUT SCALE LOW* Low output limit after rescale Range: Full scale +/–

IN HIGH LIMIT* Input high limit value applied to the PV after signal lag Range: Full scale +/–

IN LOW LIMIT* Input low limit value applied to the PV after signal lag Range: Full scale +/–

*The number of decimal places and the engineering units must match the associated Input and Output parameters’

decimal places and engineering units.

Other Operating Displays Alternator


Alternator

This display lets you see the operating parameters for the ALT function block and edit the following

parameters:

• Style

• On-Delay Time (sec)

• Off-Delay Time (sec)

• Output selections

• Input selections

• Output sequence

STATE

RUN

IN # 1 - 8

9 - 16

ALTRNTR1 12:30

OUT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

STATUS

OKDEMAND

8STYLE

DIRECT F1

ADV

F2

EDITOUT

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

IN #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OUT

2

4

6

1

3

5

0

0

IN #

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OUT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

STATE

RUN

IN # 1 - 8

9 - 16

ALTRNTR1 12:30

OUT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

STATUS

OKDEMAND

8STYLE

ROTARY F1

ADV

F2

EDITOUT

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

DMND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OUT

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

0

DMND

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OUT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Figure 84 Alternator operator displays



Table 155 Alternator operator display details

Feature Description

ALTRNTR1 Block tag name – READ ONLY

STATE OFF or RUN – READ ONLY

STATUS OK, DISABLED, or HIGH – READ ONLY

DEMAND [DMND] Input count, between 0 and 16 – READ ONLY

STYLE ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, or DIRECT – READ ONLY

NOTE: If the current style is DIRECT, the OUT number corresponds to the Input sequence that requests the OUT to turn ON. With any other style, the OUT number corresponds to the number of IN’s (DMND) that need to be ON to turn the OUT on.

IN# (LEDs) l Input is ON � Input is OFF ' Input selection is disabled

OUT (LEDs) l Output is ON � Output is OFF ' Output is disabled No LED – The output is not used.

OUTPUT STATUS Blank – Normal operating output (no designation) DNR – Device Not Ready (see Alternator Operator display for example)

OUT [16] Integer between 0 and 16 “0” indicates the output is not in the Output sequence.

F1 (ADV) Advances the output sequence. (An operator security pop-up will appear if SPP OP is selected on the OI settings dialog box on the Hybrid Control Designer.)

If the current style is DIRECT, or the manual advance option was not selected in the ALT block configuration on the Hybrid Control Designer, there is no effect when you select F1.

F2 (EDIT) Displays the EDIT ALTERNATOR display. See below.



Edit alternator display

This display opens when you select F2 (edit) on the Alternator Operator display. You can choose to edit output selections, edit input selections, edit output sequence, and also edit the parameters (Style, On delay

time, and Off delay time).

Table 156 Edit alternator display details

Feature Description

ALTRNTR1 Block tag name– READ ONLY

MAKE/BREAK MAKE – (Make before Break) Next output in the sequence is activated before deactivating an output.

BREAK – (Break before Make) The output is removed before advancing the sequence and activating the next output.

MAKE/BREAK is READ ONLY.

STYLE Select from ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, and DIRECT (If different style is selected, the change will not occur until all outputs are in the OFF state.)

ON DELAY TIME (SEC) Delay time used before turning ON the next output in the sequence Range: 0-99999 seconds

OFF DELAY TIME (SEC) Delay time used before turning OFF the next output in the sequence Range: 0-99999 seconds

EDIT OUTPUT SELECTIONS Opens the Edit Output Selections display. At this display the options are:

If selection is NOT USED, you CANNOT change it. Select ENABLED to turn ON the output pin.

Select ENABLED:

• OUT # pin turns ON.

• The READY status of the associated DENC Input number is ON.

• The associated alternator input number is ON.

Select DISABLED:

OUT # pin turns OFF, regardless of other values.

EDIT INPUT SELECTIONS Opens the Edit Input Selections display. You can change the Input Enable parameter by selecting ENABLED or DISABLED.

EDIT OUTPUT SEQUENCE Opens the Edit Output Sequence display. See Table 157.



Edit output sequence

This display lets you change the Output Sequence. Examples of reasons to change it include:

• If you are having trouble with a motor or pump (e.g., a bearing is going bad) and you want to limit the

amount of time it is used.

• If you have 3 motors and one uses more electricity than another, you may want to use two small motors

first before you use the one large motor. This could be handled by changing the sequence.

• Taking a pump out of service for maintenance.

Table 157 Edit output sequence display details

Feature Description

IN #* or DEMAND* IN # – Will appear if Style is DIRECT. DEMAND – Will appear if Style is FIXED.

NOTE: If current style is not FIXED or DIRECT, message “EDITS NOT ALLOWED IN THIS STYLE” will appear.

OUT** To change the OUT sequence, select a value between 1 and 16.

NOTE: A value of 0 cannot be changed.

*If the Style changes to ROTARY or FOFO when using Edit Output Sequence display, message “INVALID

STYLE” will be displayed instead of IN # or DEMAND.

**If ESC, ALARM, HELP, etc. keys are selected, a display will ask if you want to Save or Cancel the current output

sequence.

• Select SAVE: Pop-up message states NEW OUTPUT SEQUENCE BEING WRITTEN TO

CONTROLLER. If write fails, error message is displayed.

• Select CANCEL: The EDIT ALTERNATOR display is viewed. No changes are written to controller.

Other Operating Displays Calendar Event Block


Calendar Event Block

Overview

The Calendar Event Block compares user-entered time-and-date setpoints to the real-time clock to generate

digital Event outputs. These Event outputs can be integrated into a control strategy to activate time-

synchronized activities. For example, the Event outputs can be used turn-on or turn-off the lights in an

office building. Each Calendar Event block supports up to eight Event outputs.

In addition, the block allows you to configure up to five sets of time-and-date setpoints, called Setpoint

Groups. These Setpoint Groups can be used to activate different sets of time-and-date setpoints to handle

different conditions. Using the example of an office building, Setpoint Groups can be used to activate a

different set of time-and-date setpoints for each season of the year (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).

Each Calendar Event block supports five Setpoint Groups.

The block also allows you to configure up to 16 Special Days. On these Special Days the Calendar Event

Block will override its normal Event processing for a 24-hour period. For example, you can configure

selected Event outputs to remain off on designated holidays.

The OI allows you to perform the following actions with respect to the Calendar Event Block:

• Display the current configuration and status of a block via the Calendar Event Block Operator Display

• Activate a different Setpoint Group (when the season changes, for example)

• Edit the time-and-date setpoint parameters for a selected Event output

• Enable, disable, or modify the set-up for the Special Days

Security

The Calendar Event Block’s editing features are protected by the “Programmer/Sched./Seq./ Calendar

Operations” security group (see “Set Security”).

If this security group is enabled the Calendar Event Block Operator Display will display a security pop-up

whenever the F1 key is pressed. To access the edit displays you must enter the proper security code on this

pop-up. If the proper security code is entered the OI will display the Calendar Event Block Menu. From

this menu you can access all of the editing features associated with the Calendar Event Block.

Other Operating Displays Calendar Event Operation


Calendar Event Operation

Access

Calendar Event Operator Displays are accessed by the Display Group keys 1

through 8

.

Calendar Event Operator Display

Table 158 Calendar Event Operator Display details

Feature Description

EVENT NAME The names assigned to Events 1 through 8. These names are assigned by the customer via HC Designer.

TYPE The configured Event Type for Events 1 through 8. The Event Types are described below:

DISABLE – The Event is Disabled

5 - DAY – The Event will occur at the same time Monday through Friday.

7 - DAY – The Event will occur at the same time every day of the week, Sunday through Saturday.

DAY OF WEEK – The Event will occur once a week at the configured time.

MONTHLY – The Event will occur once every month at configured date and time.

YEARLY – The Event will occur once a year at the specified date and time.

SETPOINT This is the currently active time-and-date Setpoint value for Events 1 through 8.

FEEDBACK The value of the Feedback Signal for Events 1 through 8. The assignment of a feedback signal is optional. If no feedback signal is assigned this column of the display will be blank.

F1 - EDIT Press F1 to view the Calendar Event Block Menu.

F2 - SHOW FEEDBACK On the OI-559 the Feedback Signals are shown on a separate display.

On the OI-559 press F2 to view the Feedback Signal values for Events 1 through 8.


Note: The TYPE and SETPOINT columns show the values associated with the currently active Setpoint Group. The

information in these columns will automatically change if a different Setpoint Group is activated (see Table 163, Set

Active Setpoint Group).



Calendar Event Block Menu

This is the top-level menu for the Calendar Event Block. From here you can access the menus that will allow you to edit Event Setpoints, select the active Setpoint Group, and view or edit Special Days.

Table 159 Calendar Event Block Menu details

Feature Description

EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS Displays the menu SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING (see Table 160).

Select this item to locate and edit the Setpoint information for a selected Event.

SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP Displays the menu SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP (see Table 163).

Select this item to activate a different Setpoint Group.

EDIT SPECIAL DAYS Displays the menu EDIT SPECIAL DAYS (see Table 164).

Select this item to locate and edit one of the 16 Special Days.

VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP

Displays the menu VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP (see Table 166).

Select this item to see how the Events will behave when a Special Day occurs.

SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu

This menu allows you to select one of the five Event Setpoint Groups for editing.

Note: “SETPOINT 1”, “SETPOINT 2”, etc. are the default names for the Setpoint Groups. These names

can be modified by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown in the

table below.

Table 160 SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu details

Feature Description

ACTIVE* > 1 SETPOINT 1 Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 1 (see Table 161).

2 SETPOINT 2 Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 2.




* The word “ACTIVE >” is displayed beside the currently active Setpoint Group. The setpoint values for

the currently active Setpoint Group are always shown on the Operator Display.



EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu

This menu allows you to select one of the eight Setpoints within the selected Setpoint Group for editing.

Note: “EVENT 1”, “EVENT 2”, etc. are the default names for the Events. These names can be modified

by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown in the table below.

Table 161 EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu details

Feature Description

1 EVENT 1 Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 1 (see Table 162).

2 EVENT 2 Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 2









EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu

This display allows you to edit the parameters for the selected Event.

Table 162 EDIT EVENT SETPOINT display details

Feature Description

EVENT TYPE This is the configured Event Type for the selected Event.

DISABLE – The Event is Disabled

5 - DAY – The Event will occur at the same time Monday through Friday.

7 - DAY – The Event will occur at the same time every day of the week, Sunday through Saturday.

DAY OF WEEK – The Event will occur once a week at the configured time.

MONTHLY – The Event will occur once every month at configured date and time.

YEARLY – The Event will occur once a year at the specified date and time.

HOURS Select a value between 0 and 23. This menu item will not appear if the configured Event Type is DISABLE.

MINUTES Select a value between 0 and 59. This menu item will not appear if the configured Event Type is DISABLE.

MONTH Select a Month of the Year. This menu item will only appear when the configured Event Type is MONTHLY.

DAY * This menu item will only appear when the configured Event Type is MONTHLY, YEARLY, or DAY OF WEEK.

When Event Type = YEARLY or MONTHLY, Select a value between 1 and 31.

When Event Type = DAY OF WEEK, select a value between Sunday and Saturday.


* When Event Type = MONTHLY, entering a value of “31” means “the last day of the month”, even for

months with less than 31 days.



SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu

This menu allows you to set one of the five Event Setpoint Groups as the currently active group.

Note: “SETPOINT 1”, “SETPOINT 2”, etc. are the default names for the Setpoint Groups. These names

can be modified by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown above.

Table 163 SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu details

Feature Description

ACTIVE* > 1 SETPOINT 1 Setpoint Group 1

2 SETPOINT 2 Setpoint Group 2




ACTIVATE GROUP Select and enter a value 1 through 5 to activate the corresponding Setpoint Group, 1 through 5.

Note that the “ACTIVE>” indicator will automatically move to the newly selected Setpoint Group when press the Enter key.


* The word “ACTIVE >” is displayed beside the currently active Setpoint Group. The setpoint values for the currently active Setpoint Group are always shown on the Operator Display.



EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu

This menu allows you to select one of the 16 Special Days for editing. It also shows you the current setting for each Special Day (Month and Day). Note that the word “OFF” will be displayed in place of the Month

and Day when the Special Day is disabled.

On the OI-559 this menu is divided into two menus, due to display size limitations.

Table 164 EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu details

Feature Description

1 SPECIAL DAY 1 Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 1 (see Table 165).

2 SPECIAL DAY 2 Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 2















EDIT SPECIAL DAY S 1-8 Select this item to display the menu for SPECIAL DAYS 1 through 8.

This menu item only appears on the OI-559.

EDIT SPECIAL DAY S 9-16 Select this item to display the menu for SPECIAL DAYS 9 through 16.

This menu item only appears on the OI-559.



EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu

This menu allows you to edit the MONTH and DAY for the selected Special Day.

Table 165 EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu details

Feature Description

MONTH Select a Month of the Year (or a value of OFF to disable the Special Day).

DAY Select a value between 1 and 31 (or a value of OFF to disable the Special Day).

Note: If either the MONTH or the DAY has a value of OFF, the Special Day is disabled. Both the MONTH and the DAY must be set to a legal value to activate a Special Day.

VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display

The Calendar Event Block can be configured to override its normal Event processing when any of the 16

Special Days occurs. This override will remain in effect for the 24-hour period associated with the Special Day. This feature can be used to force selected Event outputs to remain off on designated holidays, for

example.

The choices for the override are described below:

Special Day Mode Event output behavior

DISABLE OUTPUT The Event output is disabled on Special Days (for the entire 24 hour period).

USE ALTERNATE SETPOINT On Special Days, the Event output will trigger at the Alternate Setpoint Time shown on this display.

NORMAL The behavior of the Event output is not overridden on

Special Days. The Event output will trigger the way it

normally triggers, based on the configuration of the currently active Setpoint Group.

This display allows you to see how the eight Event outputs will behave when a Special Day occurs.

Table 166 VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display details

Feature Description

EVENT NAME Name of Events 1 through 8

OUTPUT HANDLING This title is displayed when the Special Day Mode is configured as “Disable Outputs”.

SETPOINT HANDLING This title is displayed when the Special Day Mode is configured as “Use Alternate Event Times”

ALTERNATE SETPOINT Displays the Alternate Setpoint Times (Hours:Minutes). This information will only appear if the Special Day Mode is configured as “Use Alternate Event Times”.



Feature Description

EVENT 1 The Special Day Mode for Event 1










Monitoring Displays

Overview

Monitoring displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.

They are accessed by pressing 1

through 5 [8

] below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to scroll through up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have

all these displays configured.

You can monitor but not change any data on these displays except for variables on an overview display.

See also

While viewing these displays, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.


Topic Page

Trend Displays:

Horizontal Trend Vertical Trend Vertical Trend w/ Horizontal Bars Horizontal Trend w/ Digital Horizontal Trend w/ Bar Graphs

266

Bar Graph Displays:

6 Point Horizontal 6 Point Vertical 3 Point Horizontal 3 Point Vertical

270

Panel Displays:

Single Point Panel 4-Point Panel Multi Point Panel Overview

271

Other Displays:

Help

275

Monitoring Displays Trend Displays


Trend Displays

Each of the trend displays shows up to 6 points as trends. The text changes at regular intervals to describe

the name, current value, limits, and engineering units of the corresponding trend. The color of the text

matches the color of the trend: yellow text describes the yellow trend, green text describes the green trend, and so on for each of the six trends.


AI2 2200.00 DEGF

2500.0

1500.0

10:30

10:20

10:10

10:00

9:50

Horizontal Trend


FURNACE TEMPERATURE DEC08AI2 12:18 2200.00 DEGF

11:18 11:30

0

TREND1 2000.00

TREND2

1934.00

TREND3

1566.00

TREND4 1366.00

TREND5 1254.00

TREND6 1521.00

Horizontal Trend w/ Digital


FURNACE TEMPERATURE DEC08

AI2 12:18 2200.00 DEGF

11:18 11:30

0

Horizontal Trend w/ Bars


AI2 2200.00 DEGF

2500.01500.0

10:30

10:20

10:10

10:00

9:50

Vertical Trend w/ Bars


AI2 2200.00 DEGF

2500.01500.0

10:30

10:20

10:10

10:00

9:50

Vertical Trend

Figure 85 Trend displays



Table 167 Example of trend details

Feature Description

AI2 Name of one of 6 points displayed.

2200.00 The current value of the point.

DEGF Engineering units of the point.

1500.0 Lower display limit of the point.

2500.0 Upper display limit of the point.

09:40, 09:50, etc. Time stamps.

Colored Arrow Positioned at the current value of the point.

Vertical and Horizontal Bar Graphs*

Color of the bar will match the color of the trend line, pointer, and live value.

POINT1…POINT6** Shows the value of each trend in matching color.

* Horizontal or Vertical Trend with Bar Graph only ** Horizontal Trend with Digital only

TIP

Press Detail to display a menu with advanced features. See Trend menu.

Log Scale Trending

The Hybrid Control Designer lets you configure a signal tag to be displayed in exponential notation. When E-notation is active, values will be displayed in exponential notation; for example, 2500 will be displayed

as 2.5E3. When you select a signal tag with E-notation as the first signal tag when configuring a Trend

group, the OI will display the Trend in Log Scale format.



Trend menu

From any trend display, press Detail to display the following menu.

Table 168 Trend menu

Prompt Description

SCROLL Press Increment or Decrement to scroll the trend forward or backward in time. Press Detail to change to the next point on a multi-point trend. Amount of scrollable data is inversely proportional to the number of trend groups and points; that is, the more trend points that are configured, the less data that can be scrolled to.

Press Escape to restore the Trend menu. The trend display will remain at the time determined by the SCROLL.

Press Escape to restore the original trend display and cancel the SCROLL.

SET HOLD,

REL HOLD

Causes one point to remain displayed in the scoreboard. Available for live trend only.

Before selecting SET HOLD, press Detail to change the scoreboard to the desired point. Select SET HOLD and press Enter. An “H” appears in the lower right display. The HOLD will remain in effect until deliberately removed with REL HOLD.

To HOLD a different point, press Detail until the desired point is shown, then press Escape.

To release the HOLD, select REL HOLD.

DETAIL Use the Increment and Decrement keys to move the line cursor forward or backward in time. The value of the displayed point will change to its value at the new time.

If desired, press Detail to change to the next point on a multi-point trend.

Press Escape to restore the menu. The trend display will remain at the chosen point.

Press Escape to restore the trend display and to cancel DETAIL.

ZOOM Lets you magnify (zoom) the displayed scale.

Press Increment and Decrement to select the amount of magnification, shown in the lower right corner of the display. Note that the size of the Zoom cursor changes accordingly. See Figure 86.

OFF – uses point’s programmed limits (turns Zoom off)

2X – uses half of point’s programmed limits

4X – uses one fourth of point’s programmed limits.

For example, assume the currently selected point has limits of 0 and 1000 degrees F and its current value is 500. If you select a zoom of 2X, the point will be displayed with limits of 250 and 750 degrees F.

Note that zooming in on a screen with a wide time span may cause the trend to appear jagged due to the slow sampling rate for wide screens. See Table 169.

Press Detail to select the point/trace to be zoomed (magnified).

Press Enter to display the magnified trend. The popup menu is displayed to allow further analysis.

Press Escape to restore the trend display with the ZOOM limits. A “Z” appears in the lower right of the display.

Alternate method of scrolling

A trend can be also be scrolled by pressing Increment and Decrement without pressing Detail. While in

scroll mode, press Escape once to see the trend menu, or press Escape twice to return the live screen.



Sampling rates of trends

The longer the time span of a trend display, the less often the points are sampled.

Table 169 Sampling rates of trends

Time span of screen Rate at which points are sampled

30 minutes 6 seconds

1 hour 12 seconds

2 hours 24 seconds

4 hours 48 seconds

8 hours 96 seconds

24 hours 288 seconds

Example of trend zoom

TEMP7 1941.5 DEGF1500.0 2500.0

ALM

12:15

11:45

11:15

Zoom cursor

RUNZ

2X

Amount of

magnification

Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom

Monitoring Displays Bar Graph Displays


Bar Graph Displays

These displays show 3 or 6 points in a vertical or horizontal bar graph format. The 6 bar displays

periodically rotate through the name and value of each point.


TEMP 1

2500.0

1000.0

1234.50

DEGF

1234.50

DEGF

1234.50

DEGF

TEMP 2

2500.0

1000.0

TEMP 3

2500.0

1000.0

3 point vertical bar graph


2500.01000.0

TEMP 11234.50 DEGF

2500.01000.0

TEMP 2

1234.50 DEGF

2500.01000.0

TEMP 31234.50 DEGF

3 point horizontal bar graph


TEMP1 1234.50 DEGF2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP1

2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP2

2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP3

2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP4

2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP5

2500.0

1000.01234.5DEGFTEMP6

6 point vertical bar graph


TEMP 1

1234.50 DEGF

2500.01500.0

1234.50DEGF

2500.01500.0

2500.01500.0

2500.01500.0

2500.01500.0

2500.01500.0 TEMP1

TEMP2

TEMP3

TEMP4

TEMP5

TEMP6

1234.50DEGF

1234.50DEGF

1234.50DEGF

1234.50

DEGF

1234.50DEGF

6 point horizontal bar graph

Figure 87 Bar graph displays

Table 170 Bar graph display details

Feature Description

TEMP n Name of the displayed point.

1234.50 The current value of the point.

DEGF Engineering units of the point.

1000.0 Lower display limit of the point.

2500.0 Upper display limit of the point.

Monitoring Displays Panel Displays


Panel Displays

Single point rotating panel

This display is readable from a distance of approximately 30’ (8 meters). Every 5 seconds it rotates to

another point, up to 12 points.

TAGNAME

1500.0DEGF

TAGNAME

Figure 88 Panel display

Interacting with panel display

Stopping panel display rotation on a single point

Step Action Result

1 Press Detail Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display.

2 Press Detail Displays the desired point.

3 Press Enter Holds display on desired point. An “H” appears in the lower right of the display.

Resuming panel display rotation through all points

Step Action Result

1 Press Detail Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display.

2 Press Enter The “H” disappears and rotation resumes.



4-point panel

This display shows the status and values for four analog and digital points in a panel format. The display is view only. A digital point’s ON state is indicated On by a yellow dot. No dot indicates OFF state.

4-POINT PANEL TITLE

INTRUSN

ON

ZONE 1

205.00

DEGF

TEMP 2

134.4

DEGC

ZONE 2

456.2

DEGF

Figure 89 4-point panel display

Table 171 4-point panel details

Feature Description

TAGNAMEn Name of the displayed point.

Value or State The current value or state of the point.

EU Engineering units of the point.



Multi-point panel

This display contains 3 large points for distance viewing, and 4 smaller points for close-up viewing. The display is VIEW only.

TAGNAME1 2205.0 DEGF

TAGNAME2 2000.0 DEGF

TAGNAME3 ONTAGNAME4 205.0 DEGF

TAGNAME5 OFFTAGNAME6 83.5 DEGF

TAGNAME7 ON

PANEL GROUP 1

Figure 90 Multi-point panel display

Table 172 Multi-point panel details

Feature Description

TAGNAMEn Name of the displayed point.

Value or State The current value or state of the point.

EU Engineering units of the point.

Panel meter

Displays status and value of twelve analog and digital points in a panel format. This display is view-only.

A digital point’s ON state is indicated ON by a yellow dot; no dot indicates OFF state.


MY PANEL METER

TAG-0001STATE1

TAG-000212345.67

DEGF

TAG-0003STATE2

TAG-000412345.67

DEGF

TAG-0005STATE2

TAG-000612345.67

DEGF

TAG-001012345.67

PSI

TAG-001112345.67

DEGC

TAG-001212345.67

DEGF

TAG-0007STATE2

TAG-0008STATE1

TAG-0009STATE1

Figure 91 Panel meter



Overview

Displays value and status of up to twelve analog and digital signals and variables in a list format. The variables in an overview group can be edited.

TAGNAME1 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME2 1000.00 DEGFTAGNAME3 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME4 ON

TAGNAME5 OFFTAGNAME6 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME7 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME8 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME9 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME10 0.00 DEGFTAGNAME11 0.00 DEGF

TAGNAME12 0.00 DEGF

OVERVIEW GROUP 1 11:30

Figure 92 Overview

Description

A signal tag is an identifier connected to a digital or analog output pin of a function block. It is read-only

on this display.

A variable tag is a digital or analog object connection to an input pin of a function block. It can be edited on this display.

Table 173 Overview details

Feature Description

TAG NAME n Name of variable or signal.

Value or state Current value or state of the variable or signal. Press Enter to edit a variable. A popup window shows the tag name and value or state. You can change an analog variable to any value within its configured limits, and a digital variable to its ON or OFF state. Press Enter to keep the changes or press Escape to cancel the changes.

TIP

If you enter a new value or state for a variable that is not accepted, the variable might be getting its value or state from another source, namely, a Recipe Load function block within the controller’s configuration. Consider reconfiguring the controller.

Monitoring Displays Other Monitoring Displays


Other Monitoring Displays

Help

Up to 10 pages of custom help messages may be accessed under the Help key. These displays may also be

configured for access by the Display Group keys.

START-UP NOTES:

USE RECIPE #1 AFTER SHUTDOWN. CHANGE SETPT TO 450.

SHUT OFF PUMP#1.

TURN ON WATER VALVE. RESET LIMIT CONTROL.

VERIFY WATER LEVEL ON TANK#1.

MESSAGES

PAGE 1

Figure 93 Help (messages) display

Monitoring Displays Other Monitoring Displays



Maintenance

EXPLOSION HAZARD

Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.

Replace parts with appropriate Honeywell parts only. Failure to do so may result in explosion causing death or serious injury.

Overview

See Unit Setup (page 159) for common maintenance tasks.

See Parts below for hardware replacement.

Parts

The following parts may be ordered. To order, see the contact information in the front of this manual.

Table 174 Parts

Description Part Number Model

Firmware upgrade kit – Floppy Disk 51451629-501 1042

Firmware upgrade kit – Zip Disk 51451630-501 1042

Replacement display lamp 51451584-501 1042

Zip Disk Drive Kit 51451948-501 1042

Keypad 51500678-501 1042

Display 51404764-501 1042

RS485 communications cable (50 ft.) 51452101-050 All OIs

Terminal Board Assembly 51404600-501 All OIs

Disk Drive Kit 51404557-501 All OIs

Replacement display lamp 51404610-501 559 common

Cable Kit 51404797-501 559 common

Inverter Board 51404597-501 559 common

Mounting Kit 51404524-501 559-T12

Keypad 51404493-501 559-T12

Operator Interface Cover (Type 4) 51500452-501 559-T12

Bezel and Case 51404551-501 559-T12

Mounting Kit 51451322-501 559-T4

Maintenance Parts


Description Part Number Model

Keypad 51451320-501 559-T4

Panel Gasket 51451315-501 559-T4

Keyboard Connector Kit 51404533-501 559-T4

LCD Color Display with Backlight 51404528-501 559-T4


Messages

Overview

The OI displays messages that guide, advise, and warn the operator.

Table 175 shows all messages, the function in which the message appears, and a description along with any

recommended action.

Table 175 Messages

Message Function Description/Action Recommended

…FORMATTING DISK… Format Disk Disk formatting is in progress.

…INITIALIZING DISK… Data Storage disk initialization

The function is in progress.

…TEST IN PROGRSS… Disk Read/Write Self-Test

The test is in progress.

AED REPORT FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 19).

3. Reload configuration.

4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

ALARM / EVENT LOST Status line The message will appear if the controller's internal alarm or event buffer overflows before the OI has a chance to upload this information.

Make sure that the OI is powered on and is communicating correctly with the controller.

BAD STORAGE SETUP Data storage disk initialize

Initialization failed because there are no active data storage groups. This will occur if the storage mode for ALL of the data storage groups (Trend, Point Log, Alarms, and Events) is set to “Off”. Note that if a Trend or Point Log group has no Signal Tags defined, the storage mode is “Off” by default when initialization occurs.

Correct the Data Storage Setup and reinitialize.”

BEGINNING OF BUFFER Scrolling Trends The beginning of the trend data buffer was reached

BEZEL OPEN Status line The door on the Oi that protects the disk drive is currently open. Data will not be read from or written to the disk while this door is open.

CHECKING DISK Status line The OI is currently validating the disk that was just inserted.

CONTROLLER DIAG Status line The controller file has posted a diagnostic. Access Controller Diagnostic display (page 142).

Messages Overview



CONTROLLER DOES NOT ACCEPT EDITS IN CURRENT STATE/MODE

Edit Program Edit Segment Edit Segment Events Edit Schedule Edit Sequence

The controller will not accept edits to a program/segment/events/schedule/sequence with the associated programmer/scheduler/sequencer in its current state.

DB ALLOC ERROR Status line and Panel Diagnostic Log

1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 19

2. Call the OI vendor for assistance.

DB RECORD ERROR Status line and Panel Diagnostic Log


2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the controller are compatible

3. Call the OI vendor for assistance

DB VERIFY ERROR Status line and Panel Diagnostic Log


2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the controller are compatible

3. Verify that there are no loose wires in the cable that connects the OI and the controller

4. Call the OI vendor for assistance

If the OI reports this diagnostic, the following conditions may also be present:

1. The alarm help message on the alarm detail display will show "?????" if help text was set for that alarm

2. The 16-character signal descriptor will default to the 8-character signal tag

3. OI security is turned off

4. The parameter "Frequency" will show a value of "Error" on the controller status display.

DEVICE ERROR Any disk operation Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.

DEVICE NEVER INITIALIZED Data Storage Initialization

Use the service "Start New Storage Settings" to initialize the disk instead of using "Initialize Storage Disk".

DISK ERROR Status line Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.

DISK ERROR Status line An error was encountered accessing the disk. The disk may be bad or the interface to the disk drive is not functional.

Messages Overview



DISK FULL Data Storage No more space is available on one or more of the files on the disk for storage of data as programmed. This message will appear only if at least one partition on the disk is programmed for non-rollover operation. The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).

DISK FULL Store to disk:

Config Store recipe Store profile Store schedule Store sequence

Maximum 224 files per disk. Use another disk.

DISK MISSING Status line Data storage is enabled, but no disk is installed in the disk drive.

DISK WARNING Status line Floppy disk is not full but available space on one or more disk files has reached the programmed warning limit. The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).

DS INIT FAILED Status line Initialization failed. Possible reasons: disk has not been formatted, is write-protected, or is defective.

DS STATUS LOST Status line 1. Check for bad floppy disk.

2. Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.

3. Check seating of floppy cables.

4. Replace CPU.

DSK NOT CURRENT Status line When a disk is initialized the OI marks it as the “current” disk. The instrument will only store data to the “current” disk. If any other disk is placed in the drive this message will appear. The message will disappear when the “current” disk is inserted or a new disk is initialized.

END OF BUFFER Scrolling Trends The end of the trend data buffer was reached

ERROR – EDITS NOT SAVED Edit Recipe

Edit Program

A write transaction to the controller failed.

ERROR – READ FAILED Edit Recipe

Edit Program

A read transaction to the controller failed.

FILE DATA ERROR Any disk operation The requested disk operation failed because:

The disk has not been formatted. Format the disk and retry the operation.

The disk is defective. Use a new, formatted disk and retry the operation.

FILE DATA ERROR Format Disk If the floppy diskette reported less than 1,457,664 bytes following a format, it is likely that the diskette has bad sectors. Replace floppy disk.

Messages Overview



FILE NOT FOUND ON DISK Any disk operation The specified file name contains an illegal character, such as a forward slash (e.g. FILE/01.RCP). Remove the illegal character from the file name and retry the operation.

FORMAT COMPLETE Format Disk Disk formatting successfully completed.

GENERAL ERROR This message will appear if the instrument encounters any error not listed above.

HANDSHAKE FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




INITIALIZATION COMPLETE Data Storage disk initialization

The function successfully completed.

INITIALIZATION FAILED BEZEL OPEN

Data Storage disk initialization

The requested disk operation failed because the front bezel was opened.

INITIALIZATION FAILED DEVICE ERROR


The requested disk operation failed because the disk, the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.

INITIALIZATION FAILED WRITE PROTECTED


The requested disk operation failed because the disk was write protected..

INITIALIZING DSK Status line The OI is initializing the data storage disk for the current data storage set.

LOAD COMPLETE Load file from disk The function successfully completed.

LOAD/STORE LOCKED BY PC HOST

Load/store controller configuration from/to disk

User attempts to load or store configuration data while a configuration file is being downloaded via the PC over another comm. port. The message will continue to appear until the PC download is complete. Wait until the PC download has completed, and then restart the load/store from the OI menu.

LOADING CONFIG… xx% ..WAIT..

Load controller configuration from disk


LOADING PROFILE… Load Profile from disk


LOADING RECIPE… Load Recipe from disk


LOADING SCHEDULE… Load Schedule from disk


LOADING SEQUENCE… Load Sequence from disk


LOADING STORAGE SET… Load data storage set from disk


Messages Overview



MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE Must be in Program mode to perform function.

MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE OR OFFLINE MODE

Calibrate AI

Calibrate AO

The controller will not perform the function in the current controller mode.

NO MASTER PORT Communications Ports display

The controller configuration contains at least one Modbus slave block, but neither the RS-232 nor the RS-485 port is set up as a Modbus Master port. Select Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced protocol for either the RS-232 or the RS-485 port.

OI COMMUNICATION FAILURE THE OPERATOR STATION CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE CONTROLLER FILE. PLEASE CHECK THE CABLE WHICH CONNECTS THE OPER. STATION AND THE CONTROLLER FILE.

Startup of OI Check cable.

OPERATION FAILED

LOAD FAILED

VERSION x TABLE y

Disk operation Configuration load failed. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED

STORE FAILED

VERSION x TABLE y

Disk operation Configuration store failed. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED BEZEL OPEN

Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the front bezel was opened.

OPERATION FAILED DEVICE ERROR

Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the disk, the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.

OPERATION FAILED ERROR IN FILE RECORD DATA VERSION x TABLE y


The file content check failed. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED FILE VERIFY FAILED VERSION x TABLE y


The file failed the data integrity check. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED FILE VERSION IS INCORRECT VERSION x TABLE y


The file version is incompatible with the controller. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE VERSION x TABLE y


The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM mode. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED NOT ALLOWED IN CURRENT MODE

Load .DSS file from disk

The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM or OFFLINE mode.

Messages Overview



OPERATION FAILED UNEXPECTED END OF FILE VERSION x TABLE y


The end of file mark was encountered before it was expected. Retry function. If message recurs, write down message along with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED WRITE PROTECTED

Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the disk was write protected.

PRESS ENTER TO SAVE CHANGES

Setting time and date

Pressing enter will write the data to the controller. Pressing escape will leave without writing the data to the controller.

PROCESSOR EXCEP Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




PROCESSOR RESET Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




QUEUE READ FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




RAMP R/W ERROR Edit Ramp block data

The request to read or write Ramp block data to the controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

REQUEST FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




RESPONSE FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.




SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED SP Programmer, SP Scheduler, Sequencer

The SAVE feature has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software.

SEQ R/W ERROR Edit Sequencer steps

The request to read or write step data to the controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

Messages Overview



SET TIME AND DATE Data Storage Disk Initialization

Go to the Unit Setup display and set the date to the present year. Data storage cannot be started if the date is less than Jan1, 1980.

SPP R/W ERROR Edit Setpoint Programmer segments

The request to read or write SPP segment data to the controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

SPS R/W ERROR Edit Setpoint Scheduler segments

The request to read or write SPS segment data to the controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

STAGE R/W ERROR Edit Stage block The request to read or write Stage block data to the controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

STORAGE FAILURE Status line 1. Check for bad floppy disk.

2. Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.

3. Check seating of floppy cables.

4. Replace CPU.

STORAGE FULL Status line The data storage RAM buffer is full. Data is accumulating in this internal buffer (temporary storage) because it is unable to store the data on the floppy disk. Possible reasons include:

• Disk is full and storage is programmed as non-rollover.

• There is no disk in the drive.

• The disk is write-protected.

• The disk is “not current” (see DSK NOT CURRENT).

• The front bezel is open.

The message will disappear when the condition is corrected, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).

STORE COMPLETE Store file to disk The function successfully completed.

STORING CONFIG… xx% …WAIT…

Store controller configuration to disk


STORING PROFILE… Store Profile to disk


STORING RECIPE… Store Recipe to disk


STORING SCHEDULE… Store Schedule to disk


STORING SEQUENCE… Store Sequence to disk


STORING STORAGE SET… Store data storage set to disk


Messages Overview



TASK ERROR Status line A software function (task) on the OI encountered a non-recoverable error.

1. Cycle power off/on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 19)

TASK INIT FAIL Status line A software function (task) on the OI failed in its start-up initialization..

TEST COMPLETE Disk Read/Write Self-Test

The test successfully completed.

TEST FAILED Disk Read/Write Self-Test

The test failed.

UPDATING DISK Status line Storage data is being written from RAM to the storage disk.

WAIT… Edit Recipe Set Security

A write transaction with the controller is in progress.

WAIT… READING DATA Select Recipe A read transaction with the controller is in progress.

WARNING FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS PRESS ENTER TO OVERWRITE PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Store file to disk The selected file name already exists on the disk. Continuing will overwrite the file found on the disk.

WARNING INITIALIZATION WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING DISK FILES AND DATA PRESS ENTER TO INIT PRESS ESC TO ABORT


Continuing will erase all data from the disk and initialize the disk for the current storage set.

WARNING THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN RUN MODE, HELD IN OFFLINE MODE AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.

Setting controller mode

Changing the controller mode can result in its physical outputs being activated (RUN) or disabled (OFFLINE or PROGRAM).

WARNING THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE, AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.

Calibrate AI and AO

Change program mode to Off-line or Program

WARNING THIS TIME CHANGE WILL ERASE TREND DISPLAY DATA AND FLUSH STORAGE DATA TO DISK PRESS ENTER TO SAVE PRESS MENU TO ABORT

Setting time and date back

Proceeding to set the time/date backward will result in the trend data being overwritten with new data. It will also force storage buffers to be written to disk and the storage disk to be closed out (marked full).

WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING DISK FILES AND DATA PRESS ENTER TO BEGIN PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Format Disk Continuing will erase the contents of the disk.

Messages Overview



WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL OVERWRITE THE EXISTING STORAGE SETTING. PRESS ENTER TO LOAD PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Load data storage set from disk

Continuing will overwrite the data storage set currently loaded in the controller.

WATCHDOG ERROR Status line A watchdog-timer reset occurred because of a software or hardware failure. If the message recurs, contact Honeywell technical support.

WRITE-PROTECTED Status line Disk operation

The disk in the drive has its write-protected tab set to the protect position.

Messages



Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Overview

This section describes the displays and features within the OI that are used to support the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller. The selections on the Main Menu that contain information about the redundant

controller are highlighted in Figure 94.

ALARM D CONTROLLER DIAG RUN

MAIN MENU

SEQUENCERS

LOOPS

ALARMS/EVENTS/DIAG

SUMMARY DISPLAYS

UNIT SETUP

DATA STORAGE

RECIPES

SP PROGRAMMERS

DISK UTILITIES

LOG OFF

SP SCHEDULERS

APRIL 1411:30

ALARM D CONTROLLER DIAG RUNALARM D CONTROLLER DIAGALARM D CONTROLLER DIAG RUNRUN

MAIN MENU

SEQUENCERS

LOOPS

ALARMS/EVENTS/DIAG

SUMMARY DISPLAYS

UNIT SETUP

DATA STORAGE

RECIPES

SP PROGRAMMERS

DISK UTILITIES

LOG OFF

SP SCHEDULERS

APRIL 1411:30

Figure 94 Main Menu

Table 176 summarizes the items that are available to support redundant controllers.

Table 176 Location of Redundant Controller Displays

Main Menu Location Redundant Controller Menu Prompts Refer to page

Unit Setup Communication Ports Serial Port S1 Serial Port S2 Network Port E1 Network Port E2

290

Alarm/Event/Diags Controller Diagnostics Overview 295

Alarm/Event/Diags Lead CPU Diagnostics 299

Alarm/Event/Diags Reserve CPU Diagnostics 299

Alarm/Event/Diags Communication Ports Serial Port S1 Serial Port S2 Network Port E1 Network Port E2

290

Alarm/Event/Diags Rack Diagnostics 302

Note that the Redundant Controller Menu Prompts listed in Table 1 are only visible, and can only be

accessed, if the OI is connected to an HC900-C70R redundant controller.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Communication Ports Displays


Communication Ports Displays

Access

From Main Menu, select “UNIT SETUP” then select “COMMUNICATION PORTS DISPLAY”.

This display can also be reached from “ALARM/EVENT/DIAG“ on the Main Menu by selecting

“ALARM/EVENT/DIAG” and then selecting “COMMUNICATION PORTS”.

Overview

This display allows you to access the status and setup displays for the network and serial ports on the Lead

CPU. It also shows the overall diagnostic status for each of these ports.



SERIAL PORT S1 GOOD


NETWORK PORT E1 GOOD

NETWORK PORT E2 GOOD


Figure 95 Communication Ports Display

The diagnostic condition of each port is displayed to the right of the port description. See Table 177 for an

explanation of these diagnostic conditions.

To access the detailed information for any port, scroll to the desired port and press ENTER.

Note: If you are using a Honeywell OI (OI-559 or OI-1042) it must be connected to Serial Port S2 to insure proper operation of the OI. Also note that only one Honeywell OI may be connected to the controller (you

cannot connect a second OI-559 or OI-1042 to Serial Port S1).



Diagnostics and Statuses

Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses


SERIAL PORT S1

SERIAL PORT S2

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

APPLICATION ERROR

At least one response to a host resulted in an exception code or NAK.

1. Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to WARNING.



At host, determine which message is causing the exception code and fix it.

DATA LINK ERROR

A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors.

1. Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.



1. Check baud rate.

2. Check connectors.

3. Check cable polarity.

4. Isolate cable from electrical interference.

5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter used, check its power, switch/jumper settings, and polarity.

HARDWARE FAILURE

The DUART is failing to operate properly.

Replace the controller CPU module.

NETWORK PORT E1

NETWORK PORT E2

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

NETWORK SETUP ERROR

Controller/network names determined on network are illegal

Rack 1 monitor block’s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.

Rack 1 monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.

ASYS (SYSTEM MONITOR) block’s HW OK pin is turned off.

Correct the setup problem.

NO IP ADDRESS

IP address is not configured

Same as above Enter an IP address.

HARDWARE FAILURE

Ethernet port tests failed during power-up.

Same as above Replace CPU Module


If the controller’s Serial Port S1 is being used to host one or more Modbus Slave devices the message NO MASTER PORT may appear next to the MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES menu item. This message indicates that the Serial Port S1 protocol is set to a value other than “Modbus Master” or “Modbus Master Advanced.” Call up the Serial Port S1 display and set the protocol to “Modbus Master” or “Modbus Master Advanced.”



Serial Port S1

This selection will call up the Serial Port S1 display. This display contains setup, diagnostic, and status information about the S1 port on the Lead CPU. Please refer to

Table 99 –page 169, Table 100 – page 170, and Table 101 - page171 for more information about this display.

Serial Port S2 (OI)

This selection will call up the Serial Port S2 (OI) display. This display contains setup, diagnostic, and

status information about the S2 port on the Lead CPU. Please refer to Table 102, Page 172 for more

information about this display.

Network Port E1

This selection will call up the Network Ports E1 and E2 display. The details of this display are described below.

Network Port E2

This selection will call-up the Network Ports E1 and E2 display. The details of this display are described

below.

Modbus Slave Devices

This selection calls up the Modbus Slave Devices display. This display gives you an overview of the

individual slave devices attached to the controller’s Serial Port S1 when the port is set-up as a Modbus

Master. See Page 180 for more information about this display.



Network Ports E1 and E2 display

This display allows you to access setup, diagnostic, and status information about the E1 and E2 Ethernet network ports on the Lead CPU. These ports are used to communicate with host PCs and Peer controllers.

Table 178 describes the diagnostic and status information available for these ports.

Table 178 Network Ports E1 and E2 display

Feature Description




PORT E1/E2 DOUBLE REGISTER FORMAT


FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order – 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default) *




* Required for use with Honeywell Hybrid Control Designer Software.

NETWORK PORT E1 Press “ENTER” to go to the Network Port E1 Display. (See Table 179)

NETWORK PORT E2 Press “ENTER” to go to the Network Port E2 Display. (See Table 179)

VIEW HOST CONNECTIONS

Press “ENTER” to go to the network host connections display. See View Host Connections in Table 104 on Page 174.

Note that there are 10 Host Connections on the C70R Redundant Controller.

VIEW PEER CONNECTIONS

Press “ENTER” to go to the network peer connections display. See View Peer Connections in Table 106 on Page 175.




Network Ports E1 and Network Port E2 Display Details

Table 179 Network Port E1 and Network Port E2 Display details

Feature Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows condition of network port. See Network Port diagnostics in Table 177 on page 291.




MAC ADDRESS The Media Access Control address assigned to this port on the controller.

IP ADDRESS The Internet Protocol address assigned to this port on the controller.

SUBNET ADDRESS The subnet mask address assigned to this port on the controller.

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS The Internet Protocol address for the controller’s gateway device.



FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order – 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default)




All items are read only

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Alarms/Events/Diags


Alarms/Events/Diags

Access

Main menu

Overview

Alarms/Events/Diags menu allows you to view the status of alarms, events, and diagnostics. For Redundant

Controllers there are five specific menu selections for Alarms/Events/Diags. These selections are

highlighted in Figure 96.

For all other selections, refer to the specific sections in the main manual.


ALARMS / EVENTS / DIAGS

ALARM SUMMARYEVENT SUMMARY

CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW

LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS

RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS

COMMUNICATION PORTS


PANEL DIAGNOSTIC LOG

Figure 96 Alarm/Events/Diag Menu

For information on these menu selections, go to the page specified below:

CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW Page 296

LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS Page 299

RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS Page 299

COMMUNICATION PORTS Page 291

RACK DIAGNOSTICS Page 303

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Controller Diagnostics Overview


Controller Diagnostics Overview

This display summarizes the status of all of the major components of a redundant system. If there is a

problem in the system, this display will identify the affected component and then allow you go to a more

detailed display by pressing the “Enter” key.

Refer Table 180 for a description of the information contained on this display.

ALARM D C ONTROLLER DIAG RUN


SYSTEM

CPU

MEMORY

RTC

I/O RACK COMM PORT

COMM PORTS E1/E2/S1/S2

RESERVE STATUS

REDUNDANCY STATUS

RACK I/O MODULE

GOOD

RESERVE AVAILABLE

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

ERROR IN RESERVE CPU

ERROR IN RACK 4

GOOD

ALARM D C ONTROLLER DIAG RUNRUN


SYSTEM

CPU

MEMORY

RTC

I/O RACK COMM PORT

COMM PORTS E1/E2/S1/S2

RESERVE STATUS

REDUNDANCY STATUS

RACK I/O MODULE

GOOD

RESERVE AVAILABLE

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD


ERROR IN RACK 4

GOOD

GOOD

RESERVE AVAILABLE

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD


ERROR IN RACK 4

GOOD

Figure 97 Controller Diagnostics Overview

Table 180 Details of Controller Diagnostics Overview status messages


RESERVE STATUS

RESERVE AVAILABLE

Normal operation N/A N/A

RESERVE NOT AVAILABLE

1. Reserve not installed in rack.

2. Power not applied to reserve CPU

3. Neither lead nor reserve CPU has a valid configuration database

4. Firmware mismatch (lead and reserve CPUs have different firmware revisions

5. Database not synchronized with the lead

a)

b) The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.

Install reserve CPU

Apply power to reserve CPU

Download a configuration and cold start the controller

Perform a firmware upgrade so both CPUs have the same version

Replace the reserve CPU. If this doesn’t help, replace the lead CPU. If this doesn’t help, replace the backplane.

REDUNDANCY STATUS

c) GOOD Normal operation N/A N/A

NO RSM MODULE DETECTED

Switch on RSM is set between two positions.

RSM Module is not inserted

RSM Module has failed

The controller will continue to operate with a missing RSM. Automatic failover is still possible if required.

Make sure switch is in desired position

Install RSM module

Replace RSM




RSM SWITCH IS BAD

Switch is indicating an invalid position

The controller will continue to operate with a bad RSM. Automatic failover is still possible if required.

d) Replace RSM

I/O COMM ERROR ON RESERVE

Reserve CPU is unable to communicate with one or more of the I/O racks.

The lead controller will continue to control the process. Failover to the reserve is still possible if a subsequent failure renders the current lead less capable than the reserve.

Verify all cabling between the reserve CPU and the scanners.

Replace any Ethernet switches between the reserve CPU and the I/O rack(s).

Replace the reserve CPU

Replace the scanner CPU

Contact Honeywell service

DATABASE NOT SYNCHRONIZED

Hardware failure on the reserve CPU

Hardware failure on the lead CPU

Hardware failure on the CPU rack backplane

The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.


Replace the lead CPU

Replace the CPU rack backplane


INVALID CONFIG. Neither CPU has a valid configuration database


Download the desired configuration file and perform a cold start.

FIRMWARE VERSION MISMATCH

The reserve controller does not have the same version of controller firmware installed


Upgrade the CPU firmware so both the lead and reserve have the same version.

SYSTEM GOOD N/A N/A N/A

FORCED OUTPUT A block has an output that is forced.

None Remove force on block output..

INVALID CONFIG. A configuration that exceeds the loop capacity of the controller was downloaded or an invalid configuration exists.


Download a valid configuration.

SWITCH FAULT RMS switch is indicating an invalid position


Replace RSM

NO MASTER PORT

The controller configuration contains at least on Modbus slave block, but Serial Port S1 is not set up as a Modbus Master port.

The controller is not scanning the Modbus slave devices.

Select Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced protocol for either the RS-232 or RS-485 port.




RSM SWITCH MISMATCH

The lead and reserve controller are both reading the switch on the RSM, but are getting different values.


Replace the RSM


Force a failover and replace the new reserve CPU


NO RSM MODULE DETECTED

Switch on RSM is set between two positions.

RSM Module is not inserted

RSM Module has failed

The controller will continue to operate with a missing RSM. Automatic failover is still possible if required.

Make sure switch is in desired position

Install RSM module

a)

Replace RSM

BAD RSM SWITCH (LEAD)



Replace RSM

Force a failover and replace the CPU (formerly the lead, now the reserve)

BAD RSM SWITCH (RESERVE)



Replace RSM


Class Status Possible Cause

CPU* GOOD

ERROR IN RACK 1

ERROR IN RACK 2

ERROR IN RACK 3

ERROR IN RACK 4

ERROR IN RACK 5

ERROR IN LEAD CPU


ERROR ON SERIAL PORT S1

ERROR ON SERIAL PORT S2

ERROR ON E1 NETWORK PORT

ERROR ON E2 NETWORK PORT

ERROR ON SCANNER I/O LINK

REFER TO Table 182

REFER TO Table 182

REFER TO Table 182

REFER TO Table 182

REFER TO Table 182

REFER TO Table 181

REFER TO Table 181

REFER TO Table 177

REFER TO Table 177

REFER TO Table 177

REFER TO Table 177

REFER TO Table 182

MEMORY*

RTC*

I/O RACK COMM PORT*

RACK I/O MODULES*

COMM PORTS E1/E2/S1/S2*

* indicates that these menu items will take you to the appropriate diagnostic detail display when you press

“Enter”. For example, if the RACK I/O MODULES item shows a status of “ERROR IN RACK 4”,

pressing the “Enter” key will take you to the Rack Diagnostics display for Rack 4.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Lead CPU Diagnostics Display


Lead CPU Diagnostics Display

Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display

These displays show the status of the Lead and Reserve CPU modules in the redundant system. The same categories of status information are shown on each display. The CPU Position parameter on each display

identifies which physical CPU module is currently acting as the Lead or Reserve.

Refer to Table 181 for a description of the information contained on these displays.


LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS*

CPU

MEMORY

RTC

I/O RACK COMM PORT

NETWORK PORT E1

SERIAL PORT S1

RESERVE STATUS

CPU POSITION

NETWORK PORT E2

CPU-A

RESERVE AVAILABLE

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

* Or RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS

SERIAL PORT S2

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

ALARM D CONTROLLER DIAG RUNRUN

LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS*

CPU

MEMORY

RTC

I/O RACK COMM PORT

NETWORK PORT E1

SERIAL PORT S1

RESERVE STATUS

CPU POSITION

NETWORK PORT E2

CPU-A

RESERVE AVAILABLE

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

* Or RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS

SERIAL PORT S2

GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

Figure 98 Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics

Table 181 Details of Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status messages


RESERVE STATUS

RESERVE AVAILABLE

Normal operation N/A N/A

RESERVE NOT AVAILABLE

1. Reserve not installed in rack.

2. Power not applied to reserve CPU

3. Neither lead nor reserve CPU has a valid configuration database

4. Firmware mismatch (lead and reserve CPUs have different firmware revisions

5. Database not synchronized with the lead


Install reserve CPU


Download a configuration and cold start the controller

Perform a firmware upgrade so both CPUs have the same version

Replace the reserve CPU. If this doesn’t help, replace the lead CPU. If this doesn’t help, replace the backplane.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display



CPU POSITION CPU-A N/A Normal operation e)

CPU-B N/A Normal operation

CPU IS MISSING Reserve CPU is not installed or not powered.

CPU rack backplane failure


Install reserve CPU


Replace CPU rack backplane

Call Honeywell service


ADDRESS ERROR

The reserved exception occurred for an unknown reason.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

PREFETCH ERROR

CPU failed when attempting to fetch an instruction from the prefetch register.







DATA ABORT ERROR


See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

S/W INTERRUPT ERR

Software Interrupt that is not supported by the software occurred.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

UNDEFINED INSTR ERROR

Bad Instruction Detected See PREFETCH ERROR

See PREFETCH ERROR.

WATCHDOG ERROR







4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.

VECTOR ERROR

Corrupted interrupt vectors in RAM.


See WATCHDOG ERROR.


5 DAY BATTERY WARNING




Replace battery.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display



LOW BATTERY Battery voltage is low. 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.



Replace battery.

FLASH ERROR Flash failed to burn 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.




RTC GOOD N/A N/A N/A

NOT PROGRAMMED

RTC not programmed 1. Time and date is set to 00:00:00, January 1, 1970.



Program RTC.

BAD DATA Bad date and time See NOT PROGRAMMED.

1. Program RTC.

2. Cycle power.

3. Replace CPU.

4. Replace boards in rack.

5. Replace rack.

PROGRAMMING FAILURE

RTC failed to program See NOT PROGRAMMED.

See BAD DATA.

READ FAILURE Unable to read RTC See NOT PROGRAMMED.

See BAD DATA.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Communication Ports



I/O RACK COMM PORT

GOOD Normal operation N/A

DATA LINK FAILURE

• Scanner2 address switches are not in the correct position

• An I/O cable is unplugged.

• Cables are defective or are not properly shielded

• If a hub is used, it may be powered down.

• The Scanner2 is powered down.

• The Scanner2 is defective

Controller continues to run but is not able to access the I/O on the associated rack

1. Verify that the address switches on the scanner 2 are set correctly.

2. If a hub is used, check that all cables are properly connected to the hub, proper crossover cables are used, that the hub is powered, and it supports 100 Base-T.

3. Check cable shielding for proper grounding and noise immunity.

4. Make sure the cables have the correct pin out.

5. Cycle power to the Scanner 2.


7. Cycle power to the C70R.

8. Replace the expansion rack’s scanner module.



11.Replace the main CPU.

HARDWARE FAILURE

g) The I/O interface has a hardware failure.

h) Controller continues to run but is not able to access any I/O.

Replace the CPU.

PORT A/B CABLE MISMATCH

The I/O cables from CPUA and CPUB are connected to the wrong ports on the I/O scanner CPU


Swap the cables so that I/O A is connected to I/O on CPUA and I/O B is connected to I/O on CPUB

PROTOCOL MISMATCH

The firmware version in the controller CPU is not compatible with the firmware version in the I/O scanner


Upgrade the firmware in the CPU and/or scanner to be compatible versions

NETWORK PORT E1

REFER TO Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses

NETWORK PORT E2


SERIAL PORT S1


SERIAL PORT S2


Communication Ports

This display can also be reached from the Unit Setup Menu by selecting the COMMUNICATION PORTS menu item. Refer to Page 290 of this appendix for a description of this display.

For Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses, refer to Table 177.

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays Rack Diagnostics Displays


Rack Diagnostics Displays

These displays show diagnostic and status information about the I/O Racks used in a redundant control

system. There is one display for each of the five I/O Racks. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to

access the complete set of displays.


RACK DIAGNOSTICS

POWER SUPPLY DIAG

POWER SUPPLY STATUS

LEAD CPU POSITION

LEAD I/O COMM DIAG

LEAD I/O COMM STATUS

RESERVE I/O COMM STATUS

CPU

MEMORY

RESERVE I/O COMM DIAG

GOOD

BOTH ARE GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

CPU-A

GOOD

GOOD


GOOD: PORT I/O A

GOOD

GOOD: PORT I/O B

BOLD is read only

Rack 1Page 1 of 5

ALARM D CONTROLLER DIAG RUNRUN

RACK DIAGNOSTICS

POWER SUPPLY DIAG

POWER SUPPLY STATUS

LEAD CPU POSITION

LEAD I/O COMM DIAG



CPU

MEMORY


GOOD

BOTH ARE GOOD

GOOD

GOOD

CPU-A

GOOD

GOOD


GOOD: PORT I/O A

GOOD

GOOD: PORT I/O B

BOLD is read only

Rack 1Page 1 of 5

Figure 99 Rack Diagnostics Display

If a rack is not referenced in the controller configuration, the message “Not Configured” will appear at the

top of the display.

Refer to Table 182 for a description of the information contained on these displays.

Table 182 Details of Rack diagnostics error status messages



ADDRESS ERROR The reserved exception occurred for an unknown reason.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

PREFETCH ERROR CPU failed when attempting to fetch an instruction from the prefetch register.







DATA ABORT ERROR


See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

S/W INTERRUPT ERR

Software Interrupt occurred which is not supported by the software.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

UNDEFINED INSTR ERROR

Bad Instruction Detected

See PREFETCH ERROR

See PREFETCH ERROR.




WATCHDOG ERROR







4. Contact Honeywell Service.

VECTOR ERROR Corrupted interrupt vectors in RAM.


See WATCHDOG ERROR.


5 DAY BATTERY WARNING




Replace battery.

LOW BATTERY Battery voltage is low. 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.



Replace battery.

FLASH ERROR Flash failed to burn 1. Associated rack monitor block’s RACK OK pin is turned off.







POWER SUPPLY DIAG

GOOD N/A N/A N/A

POWER SUPPLY PS-1 FAILED

A scanner has redundant power supplies installed and the one identified as PS-1 is not working

Failed Power Supply

Failed Redundant Power Backplane detection circuit

Failed Rack backplane status signal

Failed Scanner2 status input

I/O rack continues to function normally using the remaining power supply

Verify that the power supply is connected to a power source

Replace power supply

Requires unit shutdown – replace redundant power backplane

Requires unit shutdown – replace rack backplane.

Requires unit shutdown – replace Scanner2.

Contact Honeywell Service.



Failed Power Supply














POWER SUPPLY STATUS

UNKNOWN No Rack communication

If under power, I/O will switch to failsafe values

Loss of Comms

If not powered (un-powered outputs)

Loss of AC mains

Bad Power Supply

Failed Scanner2

Determine and correct cause of communication failure.

Determine and correct cause of communication failure.

Restore rack operation

Restore AC mains power, reset breaker

Replace Power Supply

Replace Scanner2

REDUNDANT P/S IS NOT PRESENT

Single Power Supply configuration

Redundant Power Backplane not detected

Rack continues to function properly

No action required if single power supply rack

If dual power supply is installed:

Replace Redundant Power Backplane

Replace rack backplane

Replace Scanner2



Failed Power Supply







Requires unit shutdown – replace Redundant Power Backplane






Failed Power Supply














BOTH POWER SUPPLIES ARE GOOD

N/A None None

LEAD CPU POSITION

CPU-A CPU-A is currently the lead

N/A N/A

CPU-B CPU-B is currently the lead

N/A N/A

CPU IS MISSING Reserve CPU is not installed or not powered.

CPU rack backplane failure


Install reserve CPU


Replace CPU rack backplane


LEAD I/O COMM DIAG

GOOD Normal operation N/A

DATA LINK FAILURE








1. Verify that the address switches on the scanner 2 are set correctly.











HARDWARE FAILURE

The I/O interface has a hardware failure.

Controller continues to run but is not able to access any I/O.

Replace the CPU.





PROTOCOL MISMATCH








NO COMMUNICATIONS

Possible causes are defined by the LEAD I/O COMM DIAG that is being reported.


See the fix defined for the LEAD I/O COMM DIAG that is being reported.

MARGINAL: PORT I/O A

Rack communication with CPU-A is experiencing a high error rate

Controller continues to run but is marginally accessing the I/O on the associated rack


2. Check connectors of all cables.

3. If a hub/switch is being used, verify that it is one that is recommended by Honeywell

4. Replace cables.

MARGINAL: PORT I/O B

Rack communication with CPU-B is experiencing a high error rate





4. Replace cables

GOOD: PORT I/O A Normal operation N/A N/A

GOOD: PORT I/O B Normal operation N/A N/A

NOT USED IN THIS CONFIGURATION

None of the I/O modules contained in this rack are being used to execute the control configuration that is currently running in the controller.

N/A N/A





GOOD N/A N/A N/A

DATA LINK FAILURE








1. If LEAD I/O COMM DIAG is also “DATA LINK FAILURE”, follow the Fix defined for that diagnostic.










11.Replace the expansion rack.

HARDWARE FAILURE

The I/O interface has a hardware failure.

Controller continues to run but is not able to access any I/O.

Replace the CPU.





PROTOCOL MISMATCH





NO COMMUNICATIONS

Possible causes are defined by the RESERVE I/O COMM DIAG that is being reported.


See the fix defined for the RESERVE I/O COMM DIAG that is being reported.

MARGINAL: PORT I/O A

Rack communication with CPU-A is experiencing a high error rate





4. Replace cables.




MARGINAL: PORT I/O B

Rack communication with CPU-B is experiencing a high error rate




3. If a HUB/switch is being used, verify that it is one that is recommended by Honeywell

4. Replace cables.

GOOD: PORT I/O A Normal operation N/A N/A

GOOD: PORT I/O B Normal operation N/A N/A

NOT USED IN THIS CONFIGURATION

None of the I/O modules contained in this rack are being used to execute the control configuration that is currently running in the controller.

N/A N/A


GOOD

The detailed information for the I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS entry in the table above is also shown in Table 82 in the main part of the manual, under the “I/O” Class.

MODULE ERROR

MODULE HI CJ TEMP

FAILURE

NO COMM

BAD VERSION

Appendix B Security Bypass Procedure


Appendix B

Security Bypass Procedure

Overview

Your instrument has a security bypass code, which allows you to enter secured areas of the product. Use this bypass code if you have forgotten or lost the Engineer and/or Operator security code.

Bypass procedure

Step Action

1 When you are prompted for the engineer or operator security code, use Increment and Decrement keys to select the bypass code 783.

2 With 783 displayed, press the Display 5 key (under the display) to display the forgotten engineer or operator code.

3 To return to the previous menu without entering the secured area, press Escape. To enter the secured area, press Enter.

ATTENTION

Remove this page for security.

Appendix B



Index

Alarm

acknowledge ................................................... 139

auto acknowledge defined ................................ 139

defined ............................................................ 137

detail ............................................................... 140 indication ........................................................ 137

investigating .................................................... 137

manual acknowledge defined ........................... 139

Alarm Group ....................................................... 139

Alarm Summary .................................................. 138

Alarms/Events/Diag ............................................ 295

Alarms/Events/Diagnostics

Controller Diagnostics ..................................... 143

Panel Diagnostic Log ....................................... 154

Alternator ............................................................ 252

Analog input summary ........................................ 129 Analog output summary ...................................... 131

architecture

components .........................................................3

AT keyboard ............................................. 21, 22, 23

Auto/Manual

switching loop mode .................................. 25, 105

auto/manual bias.................................................. 128

Autotuning Output Low Limit Value ................... 117

Bar Graph displays .............................................. 270

bias

auto/manual ..................................................... 128 ratio................................................................. 114

Brightness

adjusting.......................................................... 207

Calibrate AI ........................................................ 185

cold junction.................................................... 189

example ........................................................... 188

example of CJ calibration ................................ 190

set controller mode .......................................... 186

Calibrate AO ....................................................... 193

Calibrate Motor ................................................... 198

Calibration

restore to AI factory ......................................... 191 restore to AO initial ......................................... 197

restore to CJ factory ......................................... 192

Carbon loop ........................................................ 115

cold start ............................................................... 19

Cold Start

defined .................................................... 161, 219

Communication Ports .......................................... 302

Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses.... 291

Communication Ports Displays ............................ 290

Communications ................................................. 168

expansion I/O port ........................................... 179

network port.................................................... 173

Serial Port S2 (OI) .......................................... 172

view host connections ..................................... 174 view network peer connections ........................ 175

view network peer statistics ............................. 176

Controller Diagnostics ........................................ 143

Controller Diagnostics Overview......................... 296

controller modes ................................................... 34

Controller status .................................................. 160

Data storage

calculate disk capacity ..................................... 222

controls ........................................................... 233

enabling .......................................................... 227

file name conventions...................................... 234 initialize .......................................................... 234

intervals .......................................................... 225

load settings .................................................... 235

modes ............................................................. 225

operation ......................................................... 230

overview ......................................................... 221

start new storage settings ................................. 237

store settings ................................................... 238

view settings ................................................... 236

view status ...................................................... 231

Date setting ............................................................. 163

Diagnostic

communications .............................................. 155

configuration port............................................ 156

controller ........................................................ 143

expansion I/O port ........................................... 158

I/O .................................................................. 147

network port.................................................... 157

OI port ............................................................ 156

panel log ......................................................... 154

types ............................................................... 142

Digital input summary......................................... 132 Digital output summary ....................................... 133

Disk

format ............................................................. 218

Disk File

list .................................................................. 209

Disk Files

data storage naming convention ....................... 234

file types ......................................................... 209

Disk Utilities....................................................... 208


Display

adjust brightness .............................................. 207

areas defined ..................................................... 33 user-assignable .................................................. 36

Display Group keys

relabeling .......................................................... 31

Environmental Conditions .......................................6

error messages ..................................................... 279

Escape................................................................... 25

Event summary ................................................... 141

Events

Setpoint schedule ................. See Setpoint schedule

F1-F4 buttons ....................................... 242, 243, 244

File Name Selection ............................................ 183 Files

customizing available filenames ....................... 183

firmware

revision number ............................................... 239

FLASH UPDATE FAILED ............................... 162

Floating Point Big Endian ..................... 173, 293, 294

Floating Point Little Endian .................. 173, 293, 294

Format Disk ........................................................ 218

Four Selector Switch ................................... 243, 244

H indicator ............................................................ 34

Hand/Off/Auto Switch ......................................... 246

HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays ...... 289 Help .................................................................... 275

High output limiting ................................... See Loop

HOA display ....................................................... 246

I/O Diagnostics ................................................... 147

Ignore changes to a number

how to ............................................................... 25

Keys ..................................................................... 21

Tasks using standard keys .................................. 25

Keys 1 - 8

displays accessed ............................................... 35

Labeling keys ........................................................ 31 Language ............................................................ 167

Lead CPU Diagnostics......................................... 299

Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status

messages ......................................................... 299

log off/log on ...................................................... 239

Log scale trending ............................................... 267

Loop

1 loop numeric................................................. 125

1 loop w/loop trend display .............................. 126

alarm setpoints ................................................ 116

auto/manual bias .............................................. 128

autotune .................................................. 108, 112 carbon ............................................................. 115

control ............................................................. 121

control setup .................................................... 114

high output limiting ......................................... 118

limits ............................................................... 117

Menu ............................................................... 106

modes ...................................................... 103, 119

Multiloop faceplate display ............................. 124

setup ............................................................... 106 trend ............................................................... 107

tune constants .......................................... 113, 127

Loop capacity ..................................................... 160

Loop output

changing ....................................................26, 105

Main menu ........................................................... 39

tree ................................................................... 40

Main Menu ......................................................... 289

Maintenance ....................................................... 277

Messages from system ........................................ 279

Modbus Slave Devices ........................................ 292 mode

controller modes defined ................................. 161

Mode

setting ...................................................... 160, 219

modes of operation................................................ 34

Mounting .......................................................... 7, 14

Network port details ............................................ 294

Network Port E1 ................................................. 292

Network Port E2 ................................................. 292

Network Ports E1 and E2 .................................... 293

Overview display ................................................ 274

Panel display interacting with ............................................... 271

meter .............................................................. 273

multi-point ............................................... 272, 273

single .............................................................. 271

part number

of operator interface ........................................ 239

parts

replacement .................................................... 277

PID

high output limiting ......................................... 118

power supply ........................................................ 15 Profile

load/store ........................................................ 210

Pushbuttons ........................................................ 242

Rack Diagnostics Displays .................................. 303

Rack diagnostics error status messages ................ 303

Ramp display ...................................................... 249

Recipe

load .................................................................. 45

load/store ........................................................ 216

Recipes ................................................................. 44

Redundant Controller Diagnostics error status

messages ......................................................... 296 Redundant Controller Diagnostics Overview ....... 296

Redundant Controller Displays Overview ............ 289

replacement parts ................................................ 277

Reserve CPU Diagnostics ................................... 299

revision number

firmware ......................................................... 239

Index


S indicator ............................................................. 34

Security ............................................................... 163

how to access secured area ............................... 164

Security Bypass Procedure .................................. 311

Sequence

load from disk ................................................. 214

store to disk ..................................................... 214

Sequencer operation ................................ 97, 98, 257

edit steps/edit step details ........................... 96, 102

View/edit......................................................... 101

Sequencers .................................................... 87, 256

edit .................................................................... 89 edit step details .................................................. 91

edit steps ........................................................... 90

select state ......................................................... 94

setup ................................................................. 88

view outputs ...................................................... 93

view step details ................................................ 92

Serial Port S1 ...................................................... 292

Serial Port S2 ...................................................... 292

Set language ........................................................ 167

setpoint

switch.............................................................. 114 Setpoint

switch.............................................................. 121

Setpoint program

auxiliary start value ........................................... 63

change state...................................................... 55

clear program ............................................ 55, 58

edit .................................................................... 49

edit segments .................................... 51, 55, 58, 63

elapsed time ...................................................... 58

fast forward ....................................................... 50

load ................................................................... 60

operate menu ..................................................... 58 operation ........................................................... 53

overview ........................................................... 46

popup menu ....................................................... 58

PV#2 through PV#4........................................... 58

save ....................................................... 52, 55, 58

setup ................................................................. 47

states .......................................................... 54, 56

states vs. actions ................................................ 59

time remaining .................................................. 58

view events ................................................. 58, 59

Setpoint schedule clear from scheduler ..... 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261,

262, 264

defined .............................................................. 65

edit ................................................................... 67

edit guarantee hold ............................................ 71

edit guarantee hold limits .................................. 73

edit segment events ........................................... 70

edit segments ......................................... 68, 79, 85

edit setpoints ............................................... 69, 85

load ...........................................................81, 100

load from disk ................................................. 212

operate menu . 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263

operation ..................................................... 75, 80

overview ........................................................... 65

popup menu ... 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263 save ................. 72, 79, 99, 258, 259, 261, 262, 264

setup ........................................................... 66, 88

states .......................................................... 75, 77

states vs. actions ................................................ 80

store to disk .................................................... 212

view auxiliary setpoints ..................................... 79

view details ....................................................... 84

view events ................................................. 79, 83

Site preparation ....................................................... 7

Specifications ......................................................... 5

Stage .................................................................. 247 Standard Keys

names and functions .......................................... 23

Startup .................................................................. 19

status line.............................................................. 33

Testing

disk read/write ................................................ 184

display ............................................................ 184

keypad ............................................................ 184

Time

setting ............................................................. 163

Trend .................................................................. 266

detail............................................................... 268 hold ................................................................ 268

log scale .......................................................... 267

popup menu .................................................... 268

scroll............................................................... 268

scrolling ............................................................ 28

zoom............................................................... 268

Unit Setup........................................................... 159

Variable summary ............................................... 134

Warm Start

defined ..................................................... 161, 219

Wiring .................................................................. 15 Write Database to Flash Memory ........................ 162

Z indicator ............................................................ 34


Sales and Service

For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one of the offices below.

ASIA PACIFIC Honeywell Process Solutions,

(TAC) [email protected]

Australia Honeywell Limited Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255

FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481 Toll Free 1300-36-39-36 Toll Free Fax:

1300-36-04-70 China – PRC - Shanghai Honeywell China Inc. Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568 Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826

Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd.

Phone: +(65) 6580 3278 Fax: +(65) 6445-3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone: +(822) 799 6114

Fax: +(822) 792 9015

EMEA Honeywell Process Solutions,

Phone: + 80012026455 or

+44 (0)1344 656000

Email: (Sales)

[email protected]

or

(TAC)

[email protected]

AMERICA’S Honeywell Process Solutions,

Phone: (TAC) 1-800-423-9883 or

215/641-3610

(Sales) 1-800-343-0228

Email: (Sales)

[email protected]

or

(TAC)

[email protected]

For more information To learn more about SmartLine Transmitters, visit www.honeywellprocess.com Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager

Process Solutions Honeywell

1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston, TX 77042

Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Honeywell House, Skimped Hill Lane Bracknell, England, RG12 1EB

51-52-25-108 Rev.13 May 2014

2014 Honeywell International Inc.

Shanghai City Centre, 100 Jungi Road Shanghai, China 20061 www.honeywellprocess.com

Date post:	23-Aug-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	1 times

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface For use with HC900 ... · iv 559 and 1042 Series Operator...

Documents